JP2020049380A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly advancing a game. SOLUTION: In a storage means capable of reading and writing data, at least a first storage area in which set value data is stored and a second storage area which is an unused area are necessary for advancing a game. A third storage area is provided, and the second storage area is set at an address position between the first storage area and the third storage area. Even if the number of data saved in the storage area exceeds the design upper limit, the set value data is not easily overwritten. [Selection diagram] FIG. 64

Description

  The invention described in the present specification (hereinafter, referred to as “the present invention”) relates to a gaming machine such as a slot machine and a pachinko machine (including a casino machine in which a reel stop operation is not performed).

  In general, a slot machine, which is a typical gaming machine, controls the progress of a game using reels (for example, control of reel drive, control of winning combination determination (lottery winning), reception / payout of gaming media such as gaming medals, and the like. Control board (main control means) for performing control of the game state, transition control of the game state between a plurality of game states having different probability of determining the combination, and the like, and for enhancing the interest of the game according to the game situation. A sub-control board (sub-control means) for controlling various effects (image effects by the image display device, sound effects by the speaker device, etc.) is provided. It is possible to perform only one direction to the substrate.

  In a slot machine, generally, an activated line is set by inserting a prescribed number of game media, and a reel rotation start operation such as tilting of a start lever is performed by a player, so that a winning combination determination process is started. Any game combination (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “combination”) or loss is determined, and thereafter, a plurality of reels start rotating. When a predetermined rotation speed is reached after a plurality of reels have started to rotate, a reel rotation stop operation such as pressing a stop switch is enabled, and the player performs a reel rotation stop operation for each reel, whereby each reel is stopped. Are sequentially stopped.

  Usually, the rotation stop of the plurality of reels is controlled based on the timing of the reel rotation stop operation by the player and the determined combination. That is, each reel is controlled so as to be able to stop at an arbitrary timing within a predetermined time (usually a time during which a maximum of five symbols can be moved) from the timing at which the reel rotation stop operation is performed. The combination determined (winned) (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as “permitted combination”) determined by the determination process is formed as much as possible (the combination of symbols constituting the combination (corresponding symbol) is stopped and displayed on the activated line) In addition, a combination not determined (not won) by the combination determination processing is not established (the corresponding symbol is not stopped and displayed on the activated line).

  In general, in a slot machine, a replaying role (a role in which a game medium cannot be acquired even if established, but a player can perform the next game without inserting a new game medium) or a small role ( In addition to a normal role called a role (winning role) that enables the acquisition of a predetermined number of game media when established, special game conditions (for example, the probability of determining a predetermined small role (winning probability)) Special role is provided, which is referred to as a bonus role that triggers the setting of “higher than”. Usually, only a small number of constituent symbols of the symbol combination defining such special combination are arranged on each reel.

  For this reason, even when the special combination is determined (winned), the player performs the reel rotation stop operation for each reel at the timing when the corresponding symbol can be stopped and displayed while determining the symbol to be rotated and displayed. If such an operation cannot be performed (hereinafter, referred to as "eye pressing"), it is difficult to establish a special role. However, if the special role has been determined but it cannot be established, information indicating that the special role has been determined is carried over to the next game (hereinafter, referred to as " Also referred to as “special role winning carryover”, “special role winning carryover”, etc.), even if the player is not good at pushing, the opportunity to establish the determined special role is secured.

  Further, in the conventional slot machine, a plurality of RT states (game states) having different determination probabilities (winning probabilities) of the replay combination (replay combination) are provided, and a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, a predetermined symbol It is generally known that a transition is made to another RT state triggered by a combination display being stopped). Such a transition between the RT states is controlled by the main control board since it involves a change in the probability of determining a winning combination (replaying award). Also, a period in which the determination probability of the replay combination is controlled to the RT state set to the highest is sometimes referred to as a replay time.

  On the other hand, a game period (game state) called AT (assist time) for notifying information that the player can play a game in an advantageous manner is set, and a predetermined notification effect (assist effect) is provided within the game period. It has also been done. Such an AT may be set during a period (replay time) in which the RT is controlled to the RT state in which the determination probability of the replay is set to the highest, and the AT during such a replay time is generally It is called ART (Assist Replay Time). As an assist effect performed during the AT, for example, when a small role that enables the acquisition of game media is determined (winned), the fact is notified or the determined small role is established (corresponding to An operation mode of a stop switch (an operation order (hereinafter, referred to as a “push order”) indicating the order in which a plurality of stop switches are to be operated, which is required for displaying a symbol on an active line in a stopped state) And a stop switch for notifying an operation position (hereinafter, referred to as a “push position”) indicating what rotation position the reel should be operated in, and the like.

  Heretofore, a slot machine (also referred to as a "sub-AT machine") in which the above-described AT-related control processing (also referred to as "AT-related control processing") is exclusively performed by a sub-control unit has been general. On the other hand, there has been a problem that an AT can be forcibly set by performing an illegal act (goto act). A slot machine (also referred to as a “main AT machine”) that performs a part of the control process is also known. For example, processing relating to the setting of the AT and processing for determining the pressing order to be notified during the AT are performed exclusively by the main control means, and the sub-control means is mainly determined by the main control means during the AT set by the main control means. There has been known a main AT machine that performs processing or the like for performing notification of a pressed order (assist effect). In such a main AT unit, various information regarding the AT is managed by the main control unit, and the information is appropriately transmitted from the main control unit to the sub control unit.

  Also, when a special role is established or an AT is set, a signal indicating that is sent to an external device such as a history display device or a management computer (a hall computer) installed in a game arcade (hall). (Hereinafter, such an output signal is referred to as an "outside signal" as appropriate), and based on the outboard signal, the history of the number of times the special role is established and the number of times the AT is set is grasped and displayed to the player. It is also widely used to manage the ratio of the number of paid out game media to the number of inserted game media (payout rate).

  Also, there is known a conventional slot machine that sets a state in which execution of a predetermined control process relating to the progress of a game is delayed for a predetermined time (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as “freeze”). This freeze is set in the main control board when, for example, indicating that an advantageous state has occurred for the player, thereby increasing the player's expectation that the advantageous state has occurred. Often used for the purpose of enhancing interest. In addition, when such a freeze is set, an effect of driving the reel in a special mode (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as “reel effect at the time of freeze”) is executed, or a reel is executed as in a normal game in a slot machine. Of the game (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as “pseudo game effect”) performed by driving the game.

  Further, the conventional slot machine outputs (transmits) a signal (hereinafter, referred to as a “test signal”) for transmitting various information to a predetermined test device for checking whether or not the slot machine conforms to a legal standard or the like. ) Is configured. The slot machine to be tested is configured to have specifications (hereinafter, referred to as “test specifications”) including a test circuit for electrically connecting to a test apparatus. On the other hand, slot machines of specifications (hereinafter referred to as “mass production specifications”) sold to game arcades and the like do not have a test circuit, but have the same control program as those of test specifications. A process for outputting a test signal is performed at a given predetermined timing (for example, see Patent Document 1 below).

JP 2013-230238 A

  As described above, in the conventional gaming machine, various devices have been devised to enhance the game performance and to perform a smooth game, but there is room for further improvement.

  The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly playing a game.

  The following gaming machine according to the present invention has the following features. In the following description of the characteristic configuration, an example of a configuration corresponding to an embodiment described later is shown in parentheses.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a storage unit (for example, a RAM) capable of reading and writing data, wherein the storage unit includes at least a first storage area in which set value data is stored and an unused area. A second storage area, and a third storage area in which data necessary for advancing the game are saved, wherein the second storage area is divided into the first storage area and the third storage area. By setting an address position between the storage area and the storage area, even if the number of data to be saved in the third storage area exceeds an upper limit in design, the data of the set value is hardly overwritten. It is characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine, it is possible to smoothly advance the game.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the slot machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a block diagram schematically showing a configuration of the slot machine. It is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement of reels of the slot machine. It is a figure showing the type-1 of the game combination in the said slot machine. It is a figure showing the type-2 of the game combination in the said slot machine. It is a figure showing the type-3 of the gaming combination in the said slot machine. It is a figure which shows (A) the kind of game combination-4 in the said slot machine, and (B) specific symbol. It is a figure showing a combination determination result number selection probability (re-game combination / winning combination-1) in the slot machine. It is a figure showing a combination determination result number selection probability (re-game combination / winning combination-2) in the slot machine. It is a figure showing a combination determination result number selection probability (re-game combination / winning combination-3) in the slot machine. It is a figure showing (A) combination determination result number election probability (replay combination / winning combination-4) and (B) combination determination result number election probability (special combination) in the slot machine. FIG. 4 is a block diagram conceptually showing functions of the slot machine. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a relationship between respective RT states in the slot machine. It is a diagram showing a relationship between each game mode in the slot machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of (A) AT lottery performed by the main control means of the said slot machine, (B) AT precursor G number lottery, and (C) pressing order game lottery. It is a diagram showing a pressing order instruction number-corresponding pressing order-display content correspondence table in the slot machine. It is a view showing a winning combination result number-push order instruction number correspondence table in the slot machine. (A) display mode of the push order instruction number A2 by the WIN lamp, (B) display mode of the push order instruction number A2 by the liquid crystal display device, (C) display mode of the push order instruction number A8 by the WIN lamp, (D) a display mode of the push order instruction number A8 on the liquid crystal display device, (E) a display mode of the push order instruction number A10 on the liquid crystal display device, (F) a mode in which the push order instruction number is displayed in binary by a WIN lamp, ( FIG. 8G is a diagram illustrating a manner of change of a pressing order instruction display by the liquid crystal display device. It is a figure showing an effect group number-combination determination result number correspondence table in the slot machine. FIG. 17 is a view showing a list of combination determination result numbers for mask processing in the slot machine. FIG. 14 is a view showing a list of push order instruction numbers that can be determined on the sub side in the slot machine. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a push order notification timing in the slot machine. It is a diagram showing (A) a push order notification start timing, (B) a push order notification start timing (change example), and (C) a push order notification start timing (another change example) in the slot machine. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a difference in circuit configuration between a test specification and a mass production specification on the control board of the slot machine. It is the figure of (A) modification example M1, (B) modification example M2, and (C) modification example M3 which show the difference of the circuit configuration between the test specification and the mass production specification on the control board of the slot machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a configuration of a storage area in the slot machine. (A) Operating state flag storage area, (B) operating symbol display flag storage area, (C) winning / RP combination determination result number storage area, (D) bonus combination determination result number storage area, (E) FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a pressing order instruction number storage area and (F) a winning information output period timer storage area. (A) Test output port PO7 (at the time of winning / RP winning information output), (B) Test output port PO7 (at the time of winning item winning information output), (C) Test output port PO8 (operating state) in the slot machine. FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating information output. It is a figure which shows (A) winning and RP winning information storage area, and (B) a bonus winning information storage area in the slot machine. It is a figure showing (A) stop reception specification table T1 and (B) stop reception specification table T2 in the slot machine. It is a diagram showing (A) winning information output timing, (B) re-game operation state flag set timing, and (C) BB / RB operation state flag set timing in the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows each flow of (A) test specification determination preparation processing, (B) test specification determination preparation processing (Modification J1), and (C) test specification determination preparation processing (Modification J2) in the slot machine. It is a flowchart showing the flow of the game progress control process in the slot machine. It is a flowchart showing the flow of the game start process in the slot machine. Each flow of (A) game mode 0 (lever) processing, (B) game mode 1 (lever) processing, (C) game mode 2 (lever) processing, and (D) pressing order instruction number setting processing in the above slot machine. It is a flowchart shown. (A) game mode 3 (lever) processing, (B) game mode 4 (lever) processing, (C) game mode 5 (lever) processing, (D) game mode 6 (lever) processing, (E) It is a flowchart which shows each flow of game mode 7 (lever) processing. It is a flowchart which shows each flow of (A) symbol stop test signal output processing and (B) symbol stop test signal output in the said slot machine. (A) Reel rotation start preparation processing, (B) reel rotation start preparation processing (Modification K1), (C) Reel rotation start preparation processing (Modification K2), and (D) Reel rotation start preparation processing ( It is a flowchart which shows each flow of modification example K3). Respective flows of (A) reel rotation start preparation processing (Modification K4), (B) reel rotation start preparation processing (Modification K5), and (C) reel rotation start preparation processing (Modification K6) in the slot machine are shown. It is a flowchart. It is a flowchart showing the flow of a game end check process in the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows each flow of (A) BB operation management processing, (B) RB operation management processing, (C) standby time waiting processing, and (D) interruption waiting processing in the slot machine. It is a flowchart showing the flow of RT transition processing in the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows each flow of (A) game mode 0 (all stop) processing, (B) game mode 1 (all stop) processing, and (C) game mode 2 (all stop) processing in the said slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows each flow of (A) game mode 3 (all stop) processing, (B) game mode 4 (all stop) processing, and (C) game mode 5 (all stop) processing in the slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows each flow of the (A) game mode 6 (all stop) processing and the (B) game mode 7 (all stop) processing in the said slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows each flow of (A) timer interrupt processing in the said slot machine, and a partially modified example of (B) timer interrupt processing. 4 is a flowchart showing a flow of a test signal etc. output process in the slot machine. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of test signal etc. output processing (modification example L1) in the above-mentioned slot machine. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of test signal etc. output processing (modification example L2) in the above-mentioned slot machine. It is a flowchart which shows each flow of (A) program start processing in the said slot machine, (B) sub main loop processing, and (C) power-off processing. It is a flowchart which shows each flow of (A) 1 command processing in the said slot machine, and (B) the processing at the time of a start lever. It is a flowchart which shows each flow of (A) processing at the time of the 1st body stop reception in the said slot machine, (B) processing at the time of the 2nd body stop reception, and (C) processing at the time of the 3rd body stop reception. . It is a diagram showing (A) a part of a circuit configuration of a test specification and (B) a part of a circuit configuration of a mass production specification on a control board of the slot machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. In the slot machine according to the second embodiment, (A) a part of a process performed at the start of a game, (B) a part of a process performed at the time of a timer interruption, and (C) a part of a process performed at the time of receiving a start lever operation are shown. It is a flowchart. 20 is a flowchart showing a flow of a test signal etc. output process in the slot machine according to the second embodiment. It is a figure showing (A) lighting timing pattern 1 and (B) lighting timing pattern 2 of the display lamp in the slot machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing (A) lighting timing pattern 3 and (B) lighting timing pattern 4 of the display lamp in the slot machine according to the third embodiment. It is a diagram showing (A) lighting timing pattern 5 and (B) lighting timing pattern 6 of the display lamp in the slot machine according to the third embodiment. It is a figure showing (A) lighting timing pattern 7 and (B) lighting timing pattern 8 of the display lamp in the slot machine according to the third embodiment. It is a diagram showing (A) lighting timing pattern 9 and (B) lighting timing pattern 10 of the display lamp in the slot machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 14 is a view illustrating an arrangement of electronic components on a main control board in a slot machine according to a fourth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 17 is a view illustrating the height of electronic components arranged on a main control board in the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment. In the gaming machine (slot machine) according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention, (A) RAM area of pattern 1, (B) RAM area of pattern 2, (C) RAM area of pattern 3, and (D) pattern 4 It is a figure which shows the RAM area | region, (E) RAM area | region of pattern 5, and RAM area | region which continues with (F) ROM area | region. It is a figure showing an address map of RAM in a game machine (slot machine) according to the fifth embodiment. It is a diagram showing an outline of reel control in a slot machine according to a sixth embodiment of the present invention. A flowchart showing a processing procedure when a reel rotation failure occurs during the (A) spinning drum constant speed state in the reel control in the slot machine according to the sixth embodiment, and (B) a rotation of the reel during the spinning drum acceleration state. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure when a failure generate | occur | produced, (C) The flowchart which shows the processing procedure when a power failure occurs during the rotation drum rotation state and the rotation failure of a reel occurs. (A) A flowchart showing a processing procedure when all the torso are normally stopped after the winning of the winning combination, in the reel control in the slot machine according to the sixth embodiment, (B) after receiving the third stop operation It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure at the time of a power failure, and (C) is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure at the time of rotation failure of a torso after receiving a 3rd stop operation. It is a figure showing an example of setting of the number of wins of the replaying role and the payout rate in the slot machine according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention. It is a diagram showing (A) a winning percentage simulation result, (B) winning probability of a winning combination and the number of payouts in the slot machine according to the seventh embodiment. In the slot machine according to the seventh embodiment, (A) the setting content of BB1 when the number of symbols on each reel is 21 and (B) the setting content of BB1 when the number of symbols on each reel is 20 FIG. (A) BB2 setting content when the number of symbols on each reel is 21 in the slot machine according to the seventh embodiment, (B) BB2 setting content when the number of symbols on each reel is 20, (C) is a diagram showing the settings of MB1. FIG. 19 is an outline view of a slot machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing the example of a display of the alerting picture in the above other embodiment. FIG. 13A is a diagram showing a reminder image when displayed on a small image display device, and FIG. 14B is a diagram showing a reminder image when displayed on a large image display device in the other embodiment. FIG. 14A is a diagram showing an image display timing when a game medal is provided in the other embodiment, and FIG. 14B is a diagram showing an image display timing when a game medal is not provided. In the above other embodiment, (a) is a diagram showing a display image in a case where the cherry combination is won in the normal game, and (b) is a view showing a display image in a case where the pushing order bell is won in the AT preparation game. (A) in the above other embodiment is a timing chart in a specification in which a plurality of stop switches cannot be operated simultaneously, and (b) is a timing chart in a specification in which a plurality of stop switches can be operated simultaneously. It is a timing chart which shows each operation timing in the minimum game time in the other above-mentioned embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the display timing of the alerting image in the other above-mentioned embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows another example of the display timing of the alerting image in the other embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of an image displayed in order of (a), (b), and (c) in other embodiments of the above. It is a figure which shows another example of the image displayed in order of (a), (b), (c) in the other embodiment. It is a figure showing another example of the display position of the alerting picture in the above other embodiment. FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating another example of an image displayed in the order of (a), (b), and (c) in the other embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the alerting image display timing at the time of error occurrence in the other embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows another example of the alerting image display timing at the time of error occurrence in the other embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the alerting image display timing at the time of power supply stop in the other above-mentioned embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the alerting image display timing at the time of the operation switch operation in the other embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, the “combination determination process” refers to a combination of a plurality of combination determination result numbers (one or a plurality of game combinations or losing (excluding when losing is not set)) set in advance. In order to randomly select one or a plurality of combination determination result numbers, it means a selection action such as a lottery performed using an electronic device or the like (also referred to as a combination lottery). Here, the combination determination result number is one or a plurality of game combinations that are allowed to be formed in the game in which the combination determination result number is selected (hereinafter, referred to as “permitted combinations”, “winning combinations”, and the like). Is defined.

In addition, the term “established” in the case of describing “acquired a game combination” and “established a game combination” means a game combination corresponding to the selected combination determination result number (a game combination with a payout of a game medal ( A symbol combination (corresponding symbol) constituting a winning combination such as a small combination) or a gaming combination without payout (re-gaming combination or special combination) is determined in a predetermined stop mode (for example, on an activated line described later). This is used as a concept to indicate that the information is displayed in a manner similar to that shown in FIG. However, regarding the timing of establishment, for example, when the reel stop operation is performed at a timing at which the corresponding symbol of the game can be stopped and displayed on the activated line, or the corresponding symbol of the game is stopped on the activated line Appropriate timing can be set, such as the time when it is displayed, the time when the slot machine identifies that the corresponding symbol of the gaming machine has been stopped and displayed on the activated line, or the time when the identified result is stored in the storage area. .

  Further, in the following description, a player's operation of inserting a game medal into a medal insertion slot 21 (operating for maintenance), which will be described later, and a rule required to play a game among credited (stored) game medals. A pressing operation of the 1-BET switch 22 or the MAX-BET switch 23 for providing a number of game medals for a game is generally referred to as a bet operation. The betting operation, the pressing operation of a settlement switch 24 described later, the tilting operation of a start lever (also referred to as a “start switch”) 25, and the pressing operation of the stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c by the player are collectively referred to as a game. Called operation. In general, the term “insertion” in a slot machine refers to a case where a game medal is used to mean “put in a slot machine”, and a case where a game medal is used to mean “provide for a game”. There is. In the following description, the term “insert” is basically used in the former meaning, and the term “bet” is used in the latter meaning.

  In the following description, the “payout number” of game medals means the number of game medals to be paid out in one game. In addition, the act of paying out game medals includes the act of actually paying out game medals to the outside from the slot machine (hereinafter referred to as “actual payout” as appropriate) and the game medals stored in the slot machine. There is an act of increasing a numerical value stored electromagnetically (hereinafter, referred to as “storage addition and payout” as appropriate).

  In the following description, the “acquired total number of game medals” means the difference between the total number of game medals paid out and the total number of bet game medals during a predetermined period (can be set arbitrarily). I do. However, the total number of game medals paid out in the predetermined period can be the total number obtained here.

  In the following description, “freeze” refers to a state in which the execution of a predetermined control process related to the progress of a game is delayed for a certain time. In the present embodiment, each time the RB operation (RB game) ends during the BB operation described later, a standby time at the end of the RB operation described later is set as this freeze. While the freeze is set, the game operation by the player is not effectively accepted.

<< 1st Embodiment >>
Hereinafter, a basic configuration of the slot machine according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.
<Appearance of slot machine>
As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a front door 2 that is attached to the front of a main body housing so as to be openable and closable. The upper panel assembly 10, the middle panel assembly 20, the lower panel assembly 30, and the pan assembly 40 are mounted.

  At the center of the upper panel assembly 10, a display screen 11a of an image display device 11 (see FIG. 2) disposed on the back side thereof is disposed so as to face forward, and at the periphery thereof, a first screen is provided. An effect lamp 12, second effect lamps 13a and 13b, and third effect lamps 14a and 14b are arranged. Further, a pair of upper speakers 15a and 15b are arranged on the lower left and right sides of the display screen 11a.

At the center of the middle panel assembly 20, there is provided a display window W facing the surfaces of the three reels 3a, 3b, 3c arranged side by side in the main body housing. Is a medal slot 21 for inserting game medals (game media), a 1-BET switch 22 for betting one game medal within a credited range, and a maximum bet number (for example, three). The MAX-BET switch 23 for betting game medals at once, the settlement switch 24 for paying out betted game medals and / or credited game medals, and rotation of all reels 3a, 3b, 3c are started. Start lever (start switch) 25 operated at this time, and three stop switches 26 for individually stopping the rotation of each of the reels 3a, 3b, 3c. , 26b, 26c (the left stop switch 26a in the figure corresponds to the reel 3a, the center stop switch 26b corresponds to the reel 3b, and the right stop switch 26c corresponds to the reel 3c), and the medal slot 21. A reject switch 27 and the like for returning the game medals that have been inserted and retained are provided.

  The inside of the medal insertion slot 21 includes a receiving passage (passing to a hopper 50 described later) through which the inserted game medals pass when the inserted game medals are effectively accepted, and a case where the inserted game medals are not accepted. It branches into a return passage (which leads to a game medal payout port 41 described later) through which the game medal passes, and a blocker 48 (see FIG. 2) is provided at the branch. The blocker 48 guides the game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 to the reception passage during a period in which the inserted game medals are effectively accepted, and is inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 during other periods. In order to guide the game medals to the return passage, the reception passage and the return passage are selectively configured so that one can be opened and the other can be closed. In the following description, the ON state of the blocker 48 indicates a state in which game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 are guided to the receiving passage (a state where game medals can be received), and the OFF state of the blocker 48 indicates a medal insertion state. This indicates a state where the game medals inserted into the mouth 21 are guided to the return passage (game medals cannot be accepted).

  Further, inside the medal insertion slot 21, three inserted medal sensors 28a, 28b, 28c (see FIG. 2) for detecting game medals are provided. The inserted medal sensor 28a detects that a game medal has been inserted into the medal insertion slot 21, and is located upstream of a position where the blocker 48 is installed on a passage along which the inserted game medal flows. It is installed in a position. The inserted medal sensor 28b detects that a game medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 is guided to the receiving passage and is effectively received, and is located downstream of the position where the blocker 48 is installed (described later). (Close to the hopper 50). The inserted medal sensor 28c detects that a game medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 has passed through a branch portion between the receiving passage and the return passage, and the vicinity of the branch portion (the position where the blocker 48 is installed). (A position closer to the inserted medal sensor 28b).

  When both the inserted medal sensor 28a and the inserted medal sensor 28b detect a game medal, it means that the game medal has been inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 and the inserted game medal has been effectively accepted. On the other hand, when the inserted medal sensor 28a detects a game medal but the inserted medal sensor 28b does not detect a game medal, the game medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 21, but the inserted game medal is effectively accepted. Means it was returned without Also, when the three inserted medal sensors 28a, 28b, 28c detect the passing of game medals in a different order from the predetermined order (the order of 28a, 28c, 28b), or when some of the inserted medal sensors detect the passing of game medals, Is not detected, it means that an abnormal passage such as a backward flow of the game medal has occurred.

The display window W is configured such that when all three reels 3a to 3c are stopped, three symbols for each reel, that is, a total of nine symbols are displayed so as to be visible to the player. A winning line 29 connecting the lower right of the reel 3a, the middle of the reel 3b, and the upper symbol display area of the reel 3c to the upper right is a winning line activated by betting a predetermined number of game medals. The presence or absence of a game combination is determined based on the symbol combination stopped and displayed on the winning line 29 that has been played. Hereinafter, the activated pay line 29 will be appropriately referred to as an “effective line 29”.

  The slot machine 1 is provided with various display lamps, such as LED lamps. In this embodiment, as display lamps, MAX-BET switch display lamp 46a, BET number display lamp 46b, insertion possible display lamp 46c, game start display lamp 46d, re-game display lamp 46e, status display lamp 46f, and frequency display lamp 46g, a stored number display lamp 46h, and a payout number display lamp 46j. These display lamps are configured to be controlled by a main control board 60 (main control means 100) described later.

  The MAX-BET switch display lamp 46a is lit in a situation where a game medal can be bet, and is arranged inside the MAX-BET switch 23. When the MAX-BET switch 23 is lit, the MAX-BET switch 23 is partially or entirely turned on. It is designed to shine. Other display lamps are arranged on the side or lower part of the display window W in the middle panel assembly 20.

  The BET number display lamp 46b (hereinafter also referred to as "BET lamp 46b") displays the number of betted game medals, and is lit when one or more betted game medals are lit. It comprises a lamp 46bA, a 2-BET display lamp 46bB that is lit when there are two or more, and a MAX-BET display lamp 46bC that is lit when there are three. The insertion possible display lamp 46c is lit when a game medal can be inserted, and the game start display lamp 46d is lit when the start lever 25 can be operated to start the game. Is what is done. The re-game display lamp 46e is turned on when a re-game combination described later is established in an arbitrary game and a game medal is automatically bet by an automatic bet process described later.

  The status display lamp 46f is turned on when, for example, an AT described later is set, and is turned off when the operation is completed. The number-of-times display lamp 46g is used when the AT is set. Is displayed, and then the display value of the number of games and the number of AT games is decremented by 1 (except during BB operation described later), and when the additional number of AT games is determined, The additional number is added and displayed. The stored number display lamp 46h (hereinafter also referred to as “CRE lamp 46h”) displays the number of stored (credited) game medals in seven segments, and the number-of-payouts display lamp 46j (hereinafter also referred to as “WIN lamp 46j”). ) Indicates the number of game medals to be paid out when a small combination described later is established, in seven segments.

  The WIN lamp 46j is also configured to, when an abnormality (error) occurs in the slot machine 1, display a character (alphabet) indicating the type of the error. The errors set in this embodiment include a hopper empty error in which the game medals in the hopper 50 become empty, a game medal payout error in which game medals are paid out at a timing other than the original payout timing, and an inside of the medal slot 21. Game medal stagnant error, game medal advancing in a direction different from the original route, such as a game medal intruding from a position different from the medal slot 21, and a game medal in the hopper 50. There are an auxiliary storage full error in which the medals are full, a rotation stop error in which the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c do not stop at a predetermined position, and a set value error that is a set value outside a predetermined numerical range.

  Further, the WIN lamp 46j also has a function of displaying a pressing order number, which will be described later, indicating the operating order (pressing order) of the stop switches 26a to 26c. Hereinafter, the WIN lamp 46j for displaying the pressing order number will be referred to as “main-side pressing order display” as appropriate.

  A transparent lower panel cover 31 is attached to the center of the lower panel assembly 30, and decorative lamps 32a and 32b are disposed at both left and right ends. On the back side of the lower panel cover 31, a translucent lower panel base provided with a predetermined pattern and a lower panel illuminator (both not shown) are attached, and the lower panel illuminator is turned on. By doing so, the lower panel base is illuminated from the rear side.

  The tray assembly 40 has a game medal payout opening 41 for paying out game medals, and a game medal storage plate 42 for storing game medals so as to face the game medal payout opening 41. An ashtray 43 is provided to the left of the game medal storage tray 42. Further, on the left and right sides of the gaming medal payout opening 41, a speaker opening 45a made up of a number of small holes opposes the front surfaces of a pair of lower speakers 44a, 44b (see FIG. 2) arranged on the back side of the saucer assembly 40. , 45b are formed.

  Further, a hopper 50 (see FIG. 2) for paying out game medals obtained when a predetermined prize mode is formed as a result of the game is provided in the main body housing. A medal detection unit 51 (see FIG. 2) for detecting game medals is provided. In addition, the hopper 50 has a function of physically storing game medals that have been inserted and effectively accepted. Further, an auxiliary storage 85 (see FIG. 2) for storing game medals overflowing from the hopper 50 is provided at a position near the hopper 50, and the auxiliary storage 85 is full (from the auxiliary storage 85). A full detector 86 (see FIG. 2) for detecting whether or not the game medal may overflow is provided.

<Reel>
Each of the reels 3a, 3b, 3c is configured to rotate by driving a stepping motor 35a, 35b, 35c (see FIG. 2). Each of the reels 3a, 3b and 3c is made of a light-transmitting member, and a light-transmitting reel tape on which a plurality of types of symbols (see FIG. 3) are displayed on the outer peripheral surface thereof. It is pasted. Back lamps 38a, 38b, 38c (see FIG. 2) are provided on the inner surface side of each of the reels 3a, 3b, 3c. By turning on the back lamps 38a, 38b, 38c, a display window is provided. The area of each of the reels 3a, 3b, 3c facing W is entirely illuminated from the inner surface side, or a predetermined symbol combination stopped and displayed on each of the reels 3a, 3b, 3c (for example, on the activated line 29, Only a partial area of each of the reels 3a, 3b, 3c is illuminated so as to stand out, for example, corresponding symbols of gaming units arranged on a pay line different from the activated line 29.

<Basic operations for playing games>
In order to play a game with the slot machine 1, first, a bet is made by actually inserting a game medal into the medal insertion slot 21 or a credit range is set by operating either the 1-BET switch 22 or the MAX-BET switch 23. By gambling a predetermined number of game medals within the above, the pay line 29 out of a plurality of pay lines is activated. In the present embodiment, the prescribed number of game medals required to activate the pay line 29 is set to three in each of non-RT and RT1 to RT5 game states described later. However, the specified number is not limited to this, and can be changed as appropriate, such as setting the specified number to a different value according to the RT state. Further, the activated pay line may be changed according to the number of bets on the game medals.

  Next, when the player operates the start lever 25, the number of bets is determined (the betted game medals are used for the game), and a combination determination process described later is performed. After confirming that the time has elapsed, each of the reels 3a to 3c starts to rotate, and a plurality of types of symbols displayed on the outer peripheral surface of the reels 3a to 3c move up and down (normally, from top to bottom) in the display window W. Moved and displayed. When the rotation of the reels 3a to 3c reaches a predetermined speed and becomes a constant speed, the stop switches 26a to 26c are activated (operations of the stop switches can be effectively received), and the player switches the stop switches 26a. Is operated, the rotation of the reel 3a stops, the operation of the stop switch 26b stops the rotation of the reel 3b, and the operation of the stop switch 26c stops the rotation of the reel 3c.

  Here, when the symbol combination stopped and displayed on the activated line 29 is in a predetermined winning mode (a symbol corresponding to a gaming combination capable of acquiring a game medal), the number of cards corresponding to each winning mode. Is paid out by the hopper 50 or added as a credit.

<Connection between control board and each device>
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, three control boards of a main control board 60, a sub-main control board 70A, and a sub-sub control board 70B are provided as main control boards for controlling the slot machine 1 (sub-control board). The main control board 70A and the sub-sub-control board 70B are collectively referred to as a sub-control board 70). The main control (including the drive control of the reels 3a to 3c and the processing for determining the role) related to the progress of the game is performed by a control circuit disposed on the main control board 60, and illumination by lamps such as the back lamps 38a to 38c. The control and the like are configured to be performed by a control circuit provided on the sub-main control board 70A. Further, the effect image display control by the image display device 11 and the sound generation control from the speakers such as the upper speakers 15a and 15b are configured to be mainly performed by a control circuit disposed on the sub-sub-control board 70B. I have. Further, information transmission between the main control board 60 and the sub control board 70 can be performed only in one direction from the main control board 60 to the sub main control board 70A. Information transmission with the control board 70B can be performed bidirectionally.

  The main control board 60 includes a main CPU 61 that performs various arithmetic processes related to the game, a ROM 62 that is a read-only storage device that stores a control program and the like, and a RAM 63 that is a storage device that can write and read information. The drive circuits and the like operate according to a control program stored in the ROM 62, so that control relating to the progress of the game in the slot machine 1 is performed. The ROM 62 and the RAM 63 are nonvolatile storage devices, and are configured to be able to hold stored information even when power is not supplied.

The main CPU 61 is used for a clock pulse generator 64 for generating a drive pulse, a frequency divider 65 for dividing the drive pulse generated by the clock pulse generator 64, a role determination process (lottery selection), and the like. A random number generator 66 for generating a random number and a sampling circuit 67 for sampling a random number generated by the random number generator 66 and performing a lottery are connected. The clock pulse generator 64 and the frequency divider 65 are configured to also function as an interval timer for generating an interrupt for the main CPU 61 at predetermined time intervals. The main CPU 61 executes a predetermined interrupt process or updates or resets the time measurement data of various set timers according to the pulse (clock signal) from the interval timer. The main CPU 61 transmits signals to the motor drive circuit 36a, the display lamp control circuit 47, the hopper drive circuit 52, and the sub-control board 70 via the interface circuit 68, and also detects the reel position detection circuits 37a and 37b. , 37c, signals from the payout detection signal circuit 53 and the storage state signal circuit 87.

  Here, the motor drive circuit 36a is a circuit for controlling the rotation / stop of the stepping motors 35a, 35b, 35c that respectively drive the reels 3a, 3b, 3c to rotate, and the display lamp control circuit 47 is as described above. This is a circuit for controlling various display lamps. The reel position detection circuits 37a, 37b, 37c determine the rotational positions of the reels 3a, 3b, 3c based on detection signals from reel sensors (not shown) provided on the respective reels 3a, 3b, 3c. The detection circuits 37a correspond to the reel 3a, the detection circuit 37b corresponds to the reel 3b, and the detection circuit 37c corresponds to the reel 3c. The hopper drive circuit 52 is a circuit for driving the hopper 50 to pay out game medals when a winning combination such as a small winning combination is established. The payout detection signal circuit 53 outputs a game medal from the hopper 50. This circuit transmits a payout detection signal to the main control board 60 when the payout is detected by the medal detection unit 51. Further, the storage state signal circuit 87 is a circuit that transmits a storage state signal indicating whether or not the auxiliary storage 85 is full to the main control board 60 in accordance with the detection result of the full detection unit 86. .

  The slot machine 1 is supplied with power from the power supply device 80 via the main control board 60. A power switch 81, a reset switch 82, and a setting key type switch 83 are connected to the power supply device 80, and signals from these switches are transmitted to the main CPU 61 via the interface circuit 68. ing. Further, the main CPU 61 is configured to receive a signal from the setting change switch 84 via the interface circuit 68.

  The power switch 81 is a switch that receives operations of turning on and off the power to the slot machine 1 from the power supply device 80, and the reset switch 82 is used to remove the cause of the error when a predetermined error occurs in the slot machine 1. The switch is operated by a game clerk or the like when the error is eliminated by the operation. By operating the reset switch 82, the information of the occurrence of the error stored in the main control board 60 and the sub-control board 70 is cleared, and accordingly, the processing at the time of error elimination is performed in the main control board 60 and the sub-control board 70. Be executed. The setting key type switch 83 is a switch that is operated when confirming the setting and changing the setting such as the combination determination probability (the winning probability of the game combination), and the setting change switch 84 sets the combination determination probability and the like. , For example, a switch for changing in six stages.

  When the front door 2 is open (hereinafter, referred to as “door open state”) and the power is supplied to the slot machine 1 (the power switch 81 is on), the setting key type switch 83 is turned on. By doing so, the setting can be confirmed. Further, when the door is open and the power is not supplied to the slot machine 1 (the power switch 81 is in the OFF state), the setting key type switch 83 is operated to the ON state, and the power switch 81 is turned ON in that state. When the state is operated (the power is turned on to the slot machine 1), the setting can be changed. The setting key type switch 83 can be switched between an ON state and an OFF state by inserting a predetermined key member (setting key) into a predetermined locking member provided on the main body and rotating the key member. I have. Further, the setting confirmation and the setting change cannot be executed in a state where the game is being executed (a state where a game medal is bet (including a case where an automatic bet is placed) or a state where the reels are rotating). It can be executed only in the state of waiting for a game.

The power from the power supply device 80 is supplied to the sub-main control board 70A via the main control board 60, and further supplied to the sub-sub-control board 70B via the sub-main control board 70A (the power supply apparatus 80). May be supplied directly to the sub-main control board 70A and the sub-sub control board 70B). A supply voltage monitoring circuit that monitors a voltage supply state is provided on a circuit that supplies power to the main control board 60 from the power supply device 80 and on a circuit that supplies power to the sub main control board 70A via the main control board 60. (Not shown) are provided. Each supply voltage monitoring circuit determines that the power supply has been cut off when the supply voltage has dropped to a predetermined voltage value, and outputs a power-off detection signal to the main CPU 61 and a sub-main CPU 71 described later. In addition, when each supply voltage monitoring circuit returns to a predetermined voltage value (a voltage value different from the voltage value for power-off determination (for example, a high value), but may be the same value) And a power-on detection signal is output to the main CPU 61 and the sub-main CPU 71. In addition, the voltage value at the time of detecting the power-off of the main control board 60 is set to a higher value than the voltage value at the time of detecting the power-off of the sub-main control board 70A, and is set earlier than the sub-main control board 70A. The main control board 60 is configured to perform processing (power-off processing) programmed to be executed when the power is turned off (the same may be applied to power-on).

  The main CPU 61 includes a reel stop signal circuit 91, a start lever 25, inserted medal sensors 28a, 28b, 28c, and a 1-BET switch 22 which are connected to or mounted on the switch board 90. , MAX-BET switch 23 and clearing switch 24 are input via an interface circuit 68.

  A blocker 48 is connected to the main CPU 61 via an interface circuit 68, and is configured to control ON / OFF of the blocker 48. In the following description, a signal for controlling ON / OFF of the blocker 48 is appropriately referred to as a “blocker signal”. Further, although not shown, the slot machine 1 is provided with a door sensor for detecting the open / closed state of the front door 2, and a signal from this door sensor is input to the main CPU 61 via the interface circuit 68. It has become so. The main CPU 61 determines whether the front door 2 is in a closed state (hereinafter referred to as a “door closed state”) or an open state (door open state) based on a signal from the door sensor.

Although not shown, the main CPU 61 sends an external connection terminal board or the like to a data counter, a hall computer, or the like when a predetermined game state (for example, an AT or a bonus game state described later) is reached. A predetermined signal (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as an “outer end signal”) is output via the external end signal so that the number of times set in the predetermined game state can be managed or presented to the player. It is configured.

  On the other hand, the sub-main control board 70A has a sub-main CPU 71 that mainly performs various arithmetic processing related to management of effects, a ROM 72 that is a read-only storage device storing a control program and the like, and is capable of writing and reading information. A RAM 73, which is a simple storage device, is provided, and each drive circuit or the like operates according to a control program stored in the ROM 72, thereby controlling the image and sound effects in the slot machine 1 and controlling the lamp effects. Etc. are performed. The ROM 72 and the RAM 73 are non-volatile storage devices, and are configured to be able to retain stored information even when power is not supplied. A clock pulse generator and a frequency divider (not shown) are connected to the sub main CPU 71. The clock pulse generator and the frequency divider generate an interrupt to the sub main CPU 71 at predetermined time intervals. It is configured to function also as an interval timer for causing the timer to operate. The sub-main CPU 71 executes a predetermined interrupt process and updates or resets time data of various set timers in response to a pulse (clock signal) from the interval timer.

The sub main CPU 71 is configured to receive various signals from the main control board 60 via the interface circuit 74 and transmit signals to the lamp control circuit 18. Here, the lamp control circuit 18 is a circuit for controlling lighting of lamps such as the back lamps 38a to 38c.

  The sub-main CPU 71 is configured to transmit various signals to the sub-sub-control board 70B via the interface circuit 74 and to receive various signals from the sub-sub-control board 70B. Hereinafter, a signal transmitted from the main control board 60 to the sub-main control board 70A is referred to as a “control command”, and a signal transmitted from the sub-main control board 70A to the sub-sub control board 70B is referred to as an “effect command”. A signal transmitted from the sub-sub-control board 70B to the sub-main control board 70A is referred to as a “state command”.

  On the sub-sub-control board 70B, a sub-sub CPU 75 which mainly performs various arithmetic processes related to control of image effects and sound effects, a ROM 76 which is a read-only storage device storing a control program and the like, and can write and read information A RAM 77, which is a simple storage device, is provided, and by controlling the drive circuits according to the control program stored in the ROM 76, control relating to image effects and sound effects is performed. The ROM 76 and the RAM 77 are non-volatile storage devices, and are configured to be able to hold stored information even when power is not supplied.

  The sub-sub CPU 75 receives a notification signal or an effect signal from the sub-main control board 70A via the interface circuit 78, transmits signals to the display device control circuit 16 and the speaker control circuit 17, and It is configured to transmit a status signal to 70A. The display device control circuit 16 is a circuit that controls the image display device 11 to display a predetermined effect image, and the speaker control circuit 17 controls the type and volume of sound and the like generated from speakers such as the upper speakers 15a and 15b. This is the control circuit. Note that the image display device 11 is configured to also function as a push indicator (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as a “sub-side push order indicator”) for displaying the operation order (press order) of the stop switches 26a to 26c. I have.

<Reel design>
In the present embodiment, the symbols displayed by the respective reels 3a to 3c are arranged as shown in FIG. 3 (“left reel”, “middle reel” and “right reel” in FIG. 3b and 3c, respectively). That is, each of the reels 3a to 3c has "character", "seven", "bar", "cherry", "watermelon A", "watermelon B", "bell", "replay A", "replay B", A predetermined number of ten types of "blank" symbols are arranged. The "blank" may indicate an arbitrary symbol that does not constitute a gaming combination, but in the present embodiment, these are set as symbols that constitute a gaming combination. Hereinafter, the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c may be referred to as a left reel, a center reel, and a right reel, respectively.

<Type of playing role>
In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 4 to 7, one special combination (BB combination), 13 replay combinations 1 to 13, and 24 small combinations 1 to 24. As shown in FIGS. 4 to 7, combinations of symbols (corresponding symbols) for establishing each game combination and the number of game medals to be paid out when the game combination is established are set as shown in FIGS. Is set to

For the BB combination (BB stands for Big Bonus), the corresponding symbol "character / character / character" (the names of the symbols constituting the gaming combination are described in the order of reels 3a, 3b and 3c; the same applies hereinafter) is effective. When the game is stopped and displayed on the line 29, no game medal is paid out, and from the next game, an RT state described later is set to RT5 (during BB), and a bonus game (BB game) is started there. It is a gaming role that indicates that. The BB game started by the formation of the BB combination ends when more than 450 game medals have been paid out (numerical values can be changed as appropriate). During the BB game, an RB game (RB is an abbreviation for a regular bonus) is continuously executed internally (the RB game during the BB game will be described later).

  In the present embodiment, only the BB combination is provided as a special combination, but an RB combination and an MB combination (MB is an abbreviation for a middle bonus) may be provided as another special combination. When the RB combination is established, an RB game as a bonus game (an RB game performed separately from the BB game, unlike the RB game during the BB game described above) is set to be started from the next game, and the MB combination is established. Then, it may be set so that the MB game as a bonus game is started from the next game. In this case, the RB game is terminated, for example, when the small role is established a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times) or when the predetermined number of times (for example, 12 times) of the game is completed, and the MB game is executed, for example. Alternatively, the processing may be terminated when a predetermined number (for example, more than 200) of game medals have been paid out. Also, a plurality of special roles may be provided.

  When formed, the re-game players 1 to 13 do not pay out game medals, but are allowed to perform the next game without reducing the number of game medals held by the player (re-game players). It is provided as. The re-gaming combinations 1 and 2 are not set as a transition trigger of an RT state to be described later, and are the most frequently established combinations of re-gaming combinations (especially re-gaming combinations 1). For this reason, the replays 1 and 2 are referred to as “normal RP” (RP is an abbreviation for replay) as appropriate.

As shown in the symbol arrangement shown in FIG. 3, the symbol "bell / watermelon B"("/" means "or") on the left reel, and the symbol "Replay A" on the middle reel, which constitute the re-gaming combination 1 "And the symbol" bell "on the right reel are arranged every five symbols or less on each reel. Accordingly, when the replaying game 1 is won, the corresponding symbol “Bell / Watermelon B / Replay A / Bell” executes the execution timing (valid operation of the stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c) of each reel. Irrespective of the timing accepted in the following, the same applies hereinafter), it is possible to stop and display on the active line 29 (hereinafter, referred to as “pull in” as appropriate). Like this re-game combination 1, the combination that can draw the corresponding symbol (if there are a plurality of sets, any of them) on the activated line 29 regardless of the operation timing of each stop switch will be described below. For convenience, it will be referred to as a “100% withdrawable gaming role”.

  For the re-gaming combinations 3 and 4, the establishment (the corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line 29) is a condition for shifting to the RT1 state described later. The establishment of the re-gaming combination 5 is a transition condition to the RT2 state described later, and the establishment of the re-gaming combination 6 is a transition condition to the RT3 state described later. For this reason, the replays 3, 4, 5, and 6 are appropriately referred to as “RT1 transition RP”, “RT2 transition RP”, and “RT3 transition RP”, respectively.

  The fact that the re-gaming combination 7 or 8 is selected as a winning combination in the later-described gaming mode 0 (the combination determination result numbers 15 to 19 described later are selected) is set as an execution timing of the later-described AT lottery. I have. Further, when the replaying game 7 is established, the symbol “Cherry” is stopped and displayed in the middle and middle (middle middle) display area in the display window W (the stop switch 26a is also turned on in the lower right or middle middle display area). Depending on the operation timing, “Cherry” is stopped and displayed. When the replaying game 8 is established, the symbol “Cherry” is stopped and displayed in the lower right display area in the display window W (medium). In the upper display area, "Cherry" is stopped and displayed depending on the operation timing of the stop switch 26b). For this reason, the replays 7 and 8 are appropriately referred to as “Cherry RP”.

The re-gaming combination 9 is selected as a winning combination in gaming mode 0 described later (combination determination result numbers 20 to 22 described later is selected), which is set as an execution timing of an AT lottery described later.
This replaying role 9 is appropriately referred to as “chance RP”. The re-game players 10 to 13 are game players that are set according to the necessity of control but are not established even if they are selected as the winning combinations. This is referred to as “control RP”. In addition, the re-gaming combinations 2 to 7 and 9 are gaming combinations that can be withdrawn 100%, like the re-gaming combination 1.

  The small wins 1 to 3 are winning combinations that are configured so that nine game medals are paid out when established. The small wins 1 to 3 are collectively referred to as “9 small wins” as appropriate. As is clear from the symbol arrangement shown in FIG. 3, when the corresponding symbol of the small hand 1 is stopped and displayed on the activated line 29, the symbol “Bell” is stopped side by side in the lower display area in the display window W. Is displayed. When the small win 2 is established, the symbol "bell" is stopped and displayed side by side in the display area of each middle row in the display window W. Further, when the symbol corresponding to the small combination 3 is stopped and displayed on the activated line 29, the symbol "bell" is stopped and displayed side by side in the upper display area in the display window W. From the manner in which symbols are stopped at the time of such establishment, the small wins 1, 2, and 3 are appropriately referred to as a "lower bell", a "middle bell", and an "upper bell", respectively.

  The small roles 4 to 8 are winning combinations configured to pay out one game medal when completed, and the small combinations 9 to 23 are configured to pay out 3 gaming medals when completed. It is a role. For this reason, the small wins 4 to 8 are collectively referred to as "one small win" and the small wins 9 to 23 are collectively referred to as "three small wins" as appropriate. The small combination 24 is a winning combination that is selected as a winning combination only during BB described later ("-" in the payout number column in FIG. 7A does not win (not a winning combination). )), And will be appropriately referred to as "special small role".

As is clear from the symbol arrangement shown in FIG. 3, when the corresponding symbol of the small role 21 is stopped and displayed on the activated line 29, the symbol “watermelon A / B” is displayed in the middle display area of the display window W. It is displayed side by side and stopped. Further, when the small role 22 is established, the symbol “watermelon A / B” is stopped and displayed in the display window W in the upper right corner. Furthermore, when the symbol corresponding to the small role 23 is stopped and displayed on the activated line 29, the symbol "watermelon A / B" is stopped and displayed side by side in the lower display area of the display window W. From the manner in which the symbols are stopped when they are established, the small wins 21 to 23 are collectively referred to as “watermelon small wins” as appropriate. On the other hand, the small wins 1 to 20 are collectively referred to as "bell small wins" as appropriate. Note that the small wins 1 to 6 are game play that can be withdrawn 100%.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7B, specific symbols 01, 02, and 03 are set. These are not the symbols corresponding to the game combination, but when the winning combinations E1 to E6 to be described later are selected, if the predetermined small combination cannot be established by the pressing order and the operation timing of the stop switch, the dropout is omitted. The stop line is displayed on the activated line 29 as an eye. The stop condition of the specific symbols 01, 02, and 03 on the activated line 29 is a condition for shifting to the RT1 state described later.

<Position selection result number selection probability>
8 to 11 show the correspondence between the combination determination result numbers selected in the combination determination process and the corresponding names, winning combinations, winning probabilities, and the like. Note that a plurality of selection probabilities (also referred to as “winning probabilities”) are set according to the above-described set values set by game clerks or the like. The illustrated values of the selection probabilities exemplify those corresponding to certain set values.

  8 to 11 (A), 52 combination determination result numbers for replaying and winning combinations from combination determination result numbers 0 to 51 are set, and in FIG. Of the special combination (combination determination result number 1). Hereinafter, the former combination determination result number may be referred to as “winning / RP combination determination result number”, and the latter combination determination result number may be referred to as “combination combination determination result number”.

  As shown in the drawing, each game combination is associated with each combination determination result number as a winning combination. For example, the re-gaming combinations 1 and 2 are associated with the winning / RP combination determination result number 1 as duplicate winning combinations, and the re-gaming combination 7 is associated with the combination determination result number 15 as a single winning combination. Is that the BB combination is associated with the combination determination result number 1 as the sole winning combination. It should be noted that the winning / RP combination determination result number 0 is associated with a loss (all gaming combinations are not won). The name corresponding to each combination determination result number is given for convenience in order to easily distinguish each combination determination result number.

As shown in the figure, the probability of selecting each combination determination result number is set for each of the later-described RT states (non-RT, RT1 to RT5). The numerical value of the selection probability indicates the ratio of the numerical range assigned to each combination determination result number to the entire numerical range (for example, 65536 in decimal) of the random number sequence generated by the random number generator 66. For example, the probability that the winning combination determination result number 12 (name: replaying game D1, winning combination: replaying games 1 to 4) is selected is "1 / 7.2" in RT3, and other RT states (non-RT, RT1, RT1). In (RT2, RT4, RT5), it is "0" (not selected) (the probability value is an approximate value and can be changed as appropriate).

  When the winning determination and RP combination determination result number 1 (re-game A) is selected, reel stop control for always establishing the re-game combination 1 is performed regardless of the operation order (push order) of each stop switch. It has become. For this reason, winning combination / RP combination determination result number 1 (replay A) will be appropriately referred to as “RP regardless of the order of pressing”.

  The role determination result numbers 2 to 6 (replay games B1 to B5) are selected only at RT1, and when selected, the pressing order of each stop switch is the predetermined pressing order regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch. In this case, the reel stop control for ensuring that the re-game combination 5 which is the RT2 shift RP and the re-game combination 1 or 2 which is the normal RP is always performed in the case of another pressing order. In addition, "left", "middle", and "right" described in the remarks column of the role lottery table mean the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c, and the arrangement order is the operation order (push order). Means For example, “middle left and right” indicates a pressing order in which the stop switch is operated in the order of 26a, 26c, and 26b, and “middle first” indicates a pressing order in which the stop switch 26b is operated first (the second and subsequent pressing orders are the same). No question). Hereinafter, in the combination determination result numbers 2 to 6 (replay games B1 to B5), for convenience, the push order in which the replay game 5 (RT2 shift RP) is established is “correct answer order”, and the replay games 1, 2 The pressing order in which (normal RP) is established is referred to as “incorrect pressing order”.

  The combination determination result numbers 7 to 11 (re-games C1 to C5) are selected only at RT2, and when selected, the pressing order of each stop switch is the predetermined pressing order regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch. In this case, the reel stop control that always establishes the re-game combination 6 that is the RT3 shift RP and that always sets the re-game combination 3 or 4 that is the RT1 shift RP is performed in another pressing order. . Hereinafter, in the combination determination result numbers 7 to 11 (replay games C1 to C5), for the sake of convenience, the push order in which the replay game 6 (RT3 shift RP) is established is “correct push order”, and the replay games 3, 4 The pressing order in which (RT1 shift RP) is established is referred to as “incorrect pressing order”.

The combination determination result numbers 12 to 14 (replay games D1 to D3) are selected only at RT3, and when selected, the pressing order of each stop switch is the predetermined pressing order regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch. In this case, the reel stop control is performed to always establish the re-gaming combination 1 or 2 (normal RP) as the normal RP, and to always establish the re-gaming combination 3 or 4 as the RT1 shift RP if the pressing order is another. It has become. Hereinafter, in the combination determination result numbers 12 to 13 (re-games D1 to D3), for the sake of convenience, the pressing order in which the re-games 1 and 2 (normal RP) are established is referred to as the "correct answer order", and the re-games 3 and 4 (RT1 shift RP) is referred to as an “illegal push sequence”. Further, the combination determination result numbers 2 to 14 are collectively referred to as “push order RT shift RP” as appropriate.

  The combination determination result numbers 15 and 16 (replays E and F) are selected by RT1, RT2 or RT3. When the role determination result number 15 (replay E) is selected, the replay role 7 as the cherry RP is always established regardless of the pressing order and operation timing of each stop switch, and the role determination result number 16 ( When the replay F) is selected, regardless of the pressing order and the operation timing of each stop switch, the replay role 7 or 8 which is the cherry RP is always established (the stop switch 26a is operated first and the left When the symbol “Cherry” is stopped and displayed on the reel in the lower display area, the replaying game 8 is established.) Reel stop control is performed. Hereinafter, the combination determination result numbers 15 and 16 will be appropriately referred to as “weak cherry” and “strong cherry”, respectively.

  The role determination result numbers 17 to 19 (replay games G1 to G3) are selected only at RT3, and when selected, the pressing order of each stop switch is the predetermined pressing order regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch. In this case, the reel stop control for ensuring that the replaying role 7 that is the cherry RP is always established, and for another pressing order, the replaying role 1 or 2 that is the normal RP is always performed. Hereinafter, the combination determination result numbers 17 to 19 (replay games G1 to G3) are collectively referred to as “push order cherry RP” as appropriate.

  The role determination result numbers 20 to 22 (replay games H1 to H3) are selected only at RT3, and when selected, the pressing order of each stop switch is the predetermined pressing order regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch. In such a case, the reel stop control for surely establishing the re-gaming combination 9 as the chance RP and performing the other pressing order to always establish the re-gaming combination 1 or 2 as the normal RP is performed. Hereinafter, the combination determination result numbers 20 to 22 (replay games H1 to H3) are collectively referred to as “push order chance RP” as appropriate, and the combination determination result numbers 2 to 14 (push order RT shift RP) and the combination The determination result numbers 17 to 19 (push order cherry RP) and the combination determination result numbers 20 to 22 (push order chance RP) are collectively referred to as “push order RP” as appropriate. Note that the combination determination result numbers 15 to 22 are set to be selected in the later-described game mode 0 when the later-described AT lottery is executed, and the combination determination result numbers 17 to 22 are set to the later-described game mode 3 Is set as an AT lottery execution opportunity.

  The combination determination result numbers 23 to 40 (winnings A1 to A6, B1 to B6, C1 to C6) are selected in each of the RT states other than the RT5, and when selected, each is set regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch. If the pressing order of the stop switch is a predetermined pressing order, one of the small wins 1 to 3 (included in the winning combination), which is the nine small wins, is always established. Reel stop control for ensuring that any of the small wins 4 to 8 is realized. Hereinafter, in the combination determination result numbers 31 to 40, for the sake of convenience, the pressing order in which any of the small combination 1 to 3 (9 small combination) is established is referred to as “correct answering order”, and the small combination 4 to 8 (1 copy) The pressing order in which one of the small roles is established is referred to as an “incorrect pressing order”. In addition, the combination determination result numbers 23 to 40 are collectively referred to as “6 selection pressing order bell” as appropriate. Note that the combination determination result numbers 23 to 28 (winnings A1 to A6) are set to be selected in the later-described game mode 3 when the later-described pressing order game lottery is executed.

In the present embodiment, the number of payouts is the largest among the multiple winning combinations when the stop switch is operated in the correct answering order when the 6-selection pushing order bell is selected and the effective line is one line. While the symbol of the role is drawn in preferentially, in the case of the incorrect pushing order, the number of payouts is small by preferentially pulling in the symbol set as the corresponding symbol in each corresponding symbol of the duplicate winning combination with priority. The winning combination is established (number priority control). On the other hand, when a plurality of activated lines are provided, for example, a symbol combination of “any, bell, any” (any indicates any symbol) is set as the small combination 1 and the combination is determined. When the result number 23 is selected, the corresponding symbol of the winning combination (for example, a bell symbol on the middle reel) is drawn on a plurality of activated lines (overlapping positions) in the case of the correct answering order. By performing control to draw the symbol corresponding to the winning combination (for example, the bell symbol of the middle reel) on a single activated line, a difference may be caused in the number of payouts.

  The winning combination determination result number 41 (winning D) is selected in each RT state other than RT5, and if selected, the pressing order of each stop switch is 9 small winning combinations regardless of the predetermined pressing order and operation timing. The reel stop control for ensuring that any of the small wins 1 to 3 (usually the small win 1) is always performed. Hereinafter, the combination determination result number 41 (winning D) is appropriately referred to as “common bell”.

The winning combination determination result numbers 42 to 47 (winnings E1 to E6) are selected in each RT state other than RT5, and if selected, if the pressing order of each stop switch is a predetermined pressing order, three small winning combinations ( Winning E1, E2, any of small roles 9 to 12, winning E3, E4, any of small roles 13 to 16, winning E5, E6, any of small roles 17 to 20) must be established, and other pressing In the case of the order, when the corresponding symbol of the predetermined three small combinations (see the remarks column in FIG. 11A) can be drawn on the activated line 29 according to the operation timing of the stop switch (the probability is “1 / 4 ”), the predetermined three small roles are established, and if the draw is not possible (the probability is“ 3/4 ”), the specific symbol 01
11 (see the remarks column in FIG. 11A), a reel stop control for stopping and displaying on the effective line 29 as a missing eye is performed. Hereinafter, in the combination determination result numbers 42 to 47 (winnings E1 to E6), for the sake of convenience, the pressing order in which any three small combinations are always established irrespective of the operation timing is “correct pressing order”, and other pressings are performed. The order is referred to as an “incorrect answer pressing order”. Further, the combination determination result numbers 42 to 47 are collectively referred to as “3 selection pressing order bells”, and the combination determination result numbers 23 to 40 (6 selection pressing order bells) and the combination determination result numbers 42 to 47 ( (Push order bell) is collectively referred to as “push order bell” as appropriate.

  When any of the role determination result numbers 48 to 50 (winning F to H) is selected, the operation timing of each stop switch draws the corresponding symbol of the winning combination regardless of the pressing order of each stop. Depending on whether or not it is time to put in the reels, reel control is performed such that any of the winning combinations is established or none of the winning combinations is established. Hereinafter, the combination determination result numbers 48, 49, and 50 are appropriately referred to as “weak watermelon”, “strong watermelon”, and “chance eyes”, respectively. It should be noted that the combination determination result numbers 48 to 50 are set in the later-described AT lottery execution timing to be selected in the later-described game mode 0.

  The combination determination result number 51 (winning I) is set to be selected only at RT5 (during BB). When the winning combination determination result number 51 is selected, nine small winning combinations (usually small winning combinations 1) are always established regardless of the pressing order and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 11B, the role determination result number 1 (BB01) of the role item is set so as to be selected in each RT state other than RT4 (during BB) and RT5 (during BB). . When the role determination result number 1 of this character is selected, regardless of the order of pressing the stop switches, the operation timing of each stop switch sets the corresponding symbol of the winning combination, BB role, on the activated line 29. When it is time to pull in, the BB combination is established. Note that once the winning combination determination result number 1 (BB01) is selected, the winning of the BB combination is carried over to the next game until the BB combination is established. In the state where the winning of the BB role is carried over, when the replaying role or the small role is selected as the winning role, the symbol corresponding to the replaying role or the small role is drawn into the activated line 29 with priority. Reel control is performed (priority may be given to establishment of a BB combination).

Next, the main characteristic configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS.
<Function block>
As shown in FIG. 12, the slot machine according to the present embodiment mainly performs a betting operation for betting a game medal (for example, a game medal insertion operation into the medal insertion slot 21) from a functional viewpoint. , A 1-BET switch 22 or a MAX-BET switch 23 pressing operation), a reel rotation start operation for rotating the stopped reels 3a to 3c (for example, a tilt operation of the start lever 25), and a plurality of types of symbols. For stopping the rotation of the three reels 3a, 3b, 3c for variably displaying (eg, pressing the stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c), betting or stored (credited) game medals Corresponding to each game operation performed by the player, such as a clearing operation for paying out (for example, a pressing operation of the clearing switch 24). Signal (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as a "game operation signal"), an operation signal output unit 95, a main control unit 100 (corresponding to the main control board 60) for performing main control relating to the progress of the game, A sub-control means 200 (corresponding to the sub-control board 70) for performing a predetermined effect control according to the situation is provided.

  The main control means 100 is roughly divided into a game state management means 110 for mainly managing a game state, a game progress management means 130 for mainly managing a game progress, and a main communication for controlling communication in the main control means 100. The control means 150 is provided. Among them, the game state management means 110 includes setting change / confirmation control means 111, RT control means 112, re-game operation control means 113, bonus game control means 114, freeze control means 115, game mode control means 116, AT control means. 117 and test specification control means 118.

  Further, the game progress management means 130 includes a reception medal management means 131, a hand determination means 132, a game progress information determination means 133, a reel control means 134, a stop display symbol determination means 135, a payout medal management means 136, a blocker control means 137, It comprises a display lamp control means 138, a main side pressing order management means 139, a mask processing means 140 and a pressing order game control means 141, and the main communication control means 150 comprises a control command transmitting means 151, an outer end signal transmitting means 152. And test signal transmitting means 153. Note that the above-described units in the main control unit 100 include a main CPU 61, a ROM 62, a RAM 63, hardware such as an electronic circuit, and control programs stored in the ROM 62 and the like, which are arranged on a main control board 60 shown in FIG. This is a functional representation of what is configured by software.

(Each Means Constituting Game State Management Means 110)
The setting change / confirmation control means 111 changes the set value such as the current role determination probability by operating the setting key type switch 83 to the ON state and operating the power switch 81 to the ON state in that state. The setting value is displayed on a predetermined display, and each time the setting change switch 84 is turned on during the display, the setting value is changed in, for example, six stages (setting value 1 to setting value 6), and the changed setting value is changed. It is configured to display the value on a display. In this embodiment, when the setting is changed, the information on the AT is cleared, but the information on the RT state described later is kept as it is, and after the setting is changed, the RT state returns to the state before the setting change. (It is also possible to clear the information on the RT state and return to non-RT described later after the selection is changed).

  As shown in FIG. 13, the RT control means 112 is configured to control the setting of six RT states: non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, RT4 (during BB) and RT5 (during BB). I have.

The non-RT is an RT state that is a standard (normal state) in the present embodiment, and the probability of winning a re-gaming role (type is re-gaming role 1 or 2) is a reference value (in the present embodiment, approximately “1/1”). 7.33 ”). During the non-RT state, the condition is shifted to RT1 when the condition P1 is satisfied. The condition P1 is that any one of the specific symbols 01 to 03 described above is stopped and displayed on the activated line 29.

  RT1 is the same standard RT state as non-RT, and the probability that the re-gaming role (type is re-gaming role 1, 2, 5, 7, 8, 10 to 13) will be the same value as non-RT ( (Abbreviation "1 / 7.33"). During RT1, a transition is made to RT2 when the condition P2 is satisfied. The condition P2 is that the corresponding symbol of the replaying game 5 (RT2 shift RP) is stopped and displayed on the activated line 29 (the replaying game 5 is established).

  RT2 is the same standard RT state as non-RT and RT1, and the probability of winning a re-game player (type is re-game player 1-3, 6-8, 9-13) is the same as non-RT and RT1. It is set to a value (approximately "1 / 7.33"). During RT2, the process shifts to RT3 when the condition P3 is satisfied, and shifts to RT1 when the condition P1 or P4 is satisfied. The condition P3 is that the corresponding symbol of the replaying game 6 (RT3 transition RP) is stopped and displayed on the activated line 29 (the replaying game 6 is established), and the condition P4 is that the replaying game 3 Alternatively, the corresponding symbol of 4 (RT1 transition RP) is stopped and displayed on the activated line 29 (the re-gaming combinations 3 and 4 are established).

  RT3 is set to a value (approximately "1 / 1.53") in which the probability of winning a replay (the type is replay 1 to 4, 7 to 11) is higher than non-RT, RT1 and RT2. It is in the RT state. During RT3, when the condition P1 or P4 is satisfied, the process is shifted to RT1.

  RT4 shifts from each RT state of non-RT and RT1 to RT3 when the special role (BB role in this embodiment) is won and the condition P5 of not being established (corresponding symbol is not displayed) is satisfied. This is the so-called RT state during the inside of the bonus (during the inside of the bonus). In this RT4, the probability of winning the re-gaming role (type is re-gaming role 1, 2) is set to a value higher than non-RT, RT1 and RT2, and lower than RT3 (substantially "1 / 1.94"). I have. Further, when the condition P6 is satisfied during the RT4, the process shifts to the RT5. The condition P6 is that the BB combination is realized (the corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line 29).

  RT5 is an RT state (bonus game state) when the state in which the BB game is permitted by the bonus game control means described later is set. In this RT5, it is set so that the combination determination result number 51 (winning I) in which all the small combinations (small combinations 1 to 24) are repeatedly won is always selected. In addition, during RT5, a transition to non-RT is made when the condition P7 is satisfied. The condition P7 is that the bonus game state (BB game) has been completed because game medals exceeding a predetermined number (450) have been paid out.

  The re-game operation control means 113 sets a state in which the player is allowed to perform the next game without betting a game medal held by the player when the re-game operation is established (when appropriate, the "re-game operation state"). "). When the replaying operation state is set, information indicating the replaying operation state (referred to as “replaying operation state information” as appropriate) is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 63 (described later). It has become so. Hereinafter, storing the replay operation state information is also referred to as setting or turning on the replay operation state flag, and clearing (erasing) the stored replay operation state information is referred to as a replay operation state flag. Is cleared or turned off.

The bonus game control means 114 sets the state in which the BB game is permitted to be performed from the next game (appropriately referred to as the “BB operation state”) and sets the end of the BB game when the BB combination is established. When the condition (payout of more than 450 game medals) is satisfied, the BB operation state is terminated. Hereinafter, setting to the BB operation state is also referred to as “BB operation”. The bonus game control means 114 is configured to continuously execute the RB game during the BB operation. The RB game is controlled internally (not notified to the player in particular), the first game is started at the start of the BB game, and the small role is played during the BB game (during the BB operation). The game is terminated once each time the game is formed twice or each time the game is completed (ie, every two games), and is restarted immediately after. When the BB game ends, the RB game is controlled to end (regardless of the number of small wins or the number of the game). In the present embodiment, the RB game during the BB game is set to end each time the small win is completed twice or each time the two games are completed. Alternatively, the game may be set to end every time the game is completed 12 times.

  Hereinafter, the state in which the RB game is executed is referred to as “RB operation state”, and the state in which the RB game is performed is also referred to as “RB operation”. When the BB operation state or the RB operation state is set, information indicating the BB operation state (referred to as “BB operation state information” as appropriate) is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 63 (described later). Information indicating the RB operation state (referred to as “RB operation state information” as appropriate) is stored. Hereinafter, storing the BB operation state information [RB operation state information] is referred to as setting or turning on the BB operation state flag [RB operation state flag], and stores the stored BB operation state flag [RB operation state flag]. Is also referred to as clearing or turning off the BB operation state flag [RB operation state flag]. In addition, the re-game operation state flag, the BB operation state flag, and the RB operation state flag are collectively referred to as an “operation state flag”.

  The freeze control unit 115 executes control processing (for example, processing for accepting a bet operation, a reel rotation start operation, a reel rotation stop operation, and the like) related to the progress of the game when a predetermined condition is satisfied (condition satisfaction). It is configured to set a freeze that delays by a predetermined time. In the present embodiment, a standby time at the end of the RB operation as the freeze (described later in detail) is set every time each RB game performed during the above-described BB game ends.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the game mode control means 116 includes a game mode 0 (normal time), a game mode 1 (a sign), a game mode 2 (AT preparation), a game mode 3 (AT), and a game mode 4 (BB). Preparation), game mode 5 (BB), game mode 6 (additional specialization preparation), and game mode 7 (additional specialization) to control the setting of seven game modes (words in parentheses are convenient names). It is configured.

  The game mode 0 is a non-AT mode (normal mode) that is set until an AT lottery described later is won. When the game mode 0 is set, the game mode shifts to the game mode 1 when the condition Q1 is satisfied, and shifts to the game mode 4 when the condition Q4 is satisfied. The condition Q1 is to win the later-described AT lottery, and the condition Q4 is to win the BB combination (corresponding symbol is not displayed).

The game mode 1 is a non-AT mode that is set when an AT lottery described later is won (hereinafter, referred to as “AT win”). In this game mode 1, an effect (a precursor effect) indicating that the AT has been won (it is confirmed that the AT is set) is mainly performed by the sub control means 200. ing. When the game mode 1 is set, the game mode shifts to the game mode 2 when the condition Q2 is satisfied, and shifts to the game mode 6 when the condition Q4 is satisfied. The condition Q2 is that, in the game mode 1, the number of games (hereinafter, referred to as “the number of G” means “the number of games”) determined by an AT precursor G number lottery described later (hereinafter, referred to as “number of games”).
(Referred to as "the number of precursors G") as needed.

  The game mode 2 is a mode during AT preparation which is set when the precursor G number is exhausted in the game mode 1 described above. When the game mode 2 is set, when the push order RT transition RP is selected, the correct push order is notified (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as “replay navigation”), or when the push order bell is selected. (Hereinafter referred to as “Bell Navi” as appropriate. Also, Replay Navigation and Bell Navi are collectively referred to as “Push Order Navi” as appropriate). In the game mode 2, the game mode shifts to the game mode 3 when the condition Q3 is satisfied, and shifts to the game mode 6 when the condition Q4 is satisfied. The condition Q3 is that the stop switch is set to RT3 or that the stop switch is operated in a pressing order different from the correct pressing order notified by the pressing order navigation.

  The game mode 3 is a mode during AT. When the game mode 3 is set, the number of games managed (counted) by an AT counter to be described later (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as “the number of AT games”) is set, and the pushing order navigation is executed. When the condition Q8 that the game corresponding to the number of AT games is consumed (the value of the AT counter becomes “0”) is satisfied when the game mode is set to the game mode 3, the game mode 0 or the game mode 1 ( When the AT stock number is “0” when the AT game number is exhausted, the game mode is shifted to the game mode 0, and when the AT stock number is “1” or more, the game mode is shifted to the game mode 1), and the above condition Q4 is satisfied. Then, the mode is shifted to the game mode 6.

  The game mode 4 is a BB preparation mode that is set during the game mode 0 (therefore, no AT win) in which the condition Q4 (BB win) is satisfied. When the condition Q5 is satisfied while the game mode 4 is set, the game mode 5 is set. The condition Q5 is that the BB combination is realized (the corresponding symbol of the BB combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line 29).

  The game mode 5 is a mode during BB which is shifted from the game mode 4 (therefore, the state in which no AT is won) when the BB combination is established. When the game mode 5 is set, the game mode is shifted to the game mode 0 when the condition Q6 is satisfied, and the game mode is shifted to the game mode 2 when the condition Q7 is satisfied. The condition Q6 is that the BB game ends in a state where there is no AT winning (each game AT lottery is performed in the game mode 5 as described later) (the number of AT stocks = 0), and the condition Q7 is This means that the BB game ends in a state where there is a winning (the number of AT stock> 0).

  The game mode 6 is an additional specialization preparation mode that is set by satisfying the above condition Q4 (BB role winning) in the game mode 1, the game mode 2, and the game mode 3 (therefore, the state in which the AT winning has occurred). is there. When the condition Q5 (BB combination) is satisfied when the game mode 6 is set, the game mode 7 is set. In the present embodiment, when the game mode is shifted to the game mode 6 (when the mode is shifted to the inside of the BB (RT4) in a state where the AT has been won), the notification of the correct answer order (push order navigation) is basically performed. No (However, a separate internal counter is provided, and if the special role (BB role) is won, but is not established, the internal medium counter is set and the number of games until the internal medium counter reaches 0 is pushed. May be notified to make it difficult to recognize that the game mode has shifted to the game mode 6). The reason why the pressing order is not notified in the game mode 6 is to reduce the payout rate inside the BB. On the other hand, if it is not necessary to lower the payout rate inside the BB, the pressing order may be notified even in the game mode 6.

The game mode 7 is an additional special mode (an increase in the number of AT stock can be expected) which is shifted from the game mode 6 (therefore, a state in which the AT has been won) when the BB combination is established. When the condition Q7 (the BB game ends in the state where the AT has been won) is satisfied while the game mode 7 is set, the mode is shifted to the game mode 2. It should be noted that the AT stock number is increased by "1" when the game mode is shifted from the game mode 6 to the game mode 7, and the AT stock number is decreased by "1" when the BB game ends and the game mode ends. It has become.

  The AT control means 117 determines that the condition Q3 is satisfied when the game mode is set to the game mode 2 (the condition is set to RT3 or different from the correct push order notified by the push order navigation). The AT setting condition is that the stop switch is operated in the pressing order, and the AT counter that manages the number of AT games is set when the AT setting condition is satisfied (in this embodiment, the initial value is “50”). However, the numerical value can be arbitrarily changed) (at this time, the transition to the game mode 3 is also performed by the game mode control means). The fact that the setting of RT3 is set as the AT setting condition has a meaning that the AT is started at RT3, which is advantageous for the player and has a high winning probability of the replaying role.

  On the other hand, the fact that the stop switch is operated in a pressing order different from the correct answer pressing order notified by the pressing order navigation is also set as the AT setting condition for the following reason. That is, in the game mode 2, the AT counter is not set, but the pressing order navigation is executed. For this reason, when only the transition to RT3 is set as the AT setting condition (the AT counter is not set even if a push order different from the push order notified in the game mode 2 is executed), the replay navigation is performed. As long as the player executes a different pressing order from the notified pressing order, the process is not shifted to RT3, so that the game mode 2 is kept set. When the game mode 2 is set, the bell navigator is also performed. Therefore, by following the bell navigator without following the replay navigation, a period in which the number of game medals increases can be maintained permanently. Therefore, when a pressing order different from the notified pressing order is executed in the game mode 2, the AT counter is set (the transition to the game mode 3 is also performed), and the AT is started. . In this case, the AT is started at the non-RT, RT1, and RT2 in which the winning probability of the re-game combination is lower than RT3. Further, if the BB combination is won while the game mode 2 is set, the game mode is shifted to the game mode 6 (or the game mode 7 if the BB combination is established). If the game mode 2 is allowed to be maintained due to the absence, the situation may occur where the number of AT stocks increases without starting the AT.

  Further, in this embodiment, the value of the set AT counter is subtracted by "1" for each game (except during the game modes 6 and 7), and the AT is terminated when the AT counter reaches "0". ing. That is, in the present embodiment, the end condition of the AT is that the game corresponding to the number of the AT games (50 games) has been consumed. In addition, as a change mode, a predetermined number of game medals have been paid out during the AT period, a predetermined number of obtained medals (total number of differences between the number of payouts and the number of bets) has been obtained, May be used as the AT termination condition.

  In the present embodiment, when the BB combination is won or established and the game mode is set to the game modes 6 and 7 with the AT counter set, the AT counter is not subtracted as described above (the subtraction is performed). Can also be used). By doing in this way, even if the BB combination is won or established when the AT is set, it does not hurt the player (the AT is changed from the state before the BB combination is won after the BB game ends). Can be resumed). Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, even if the AT is set (the AT counter is set) due to the execution of the pressing order different from the notified pressing order in the game mode 2, the subsequent steps are performed. Although the pressing order is also notified, the pressing order may not be notified (the period during which the pressing order is not notified may be limited to only a few games).

The test specification control means 118 determines whether the slot machine 1 is of the test specification or of the mass production specification (a specific determination method will be described later). Executes control processing (for example, setting a timer for a winning information output period described later, outputs a test signal described later when it is determined to be the test specification, but outputs when it is determined to be the mass production specification. No) (details will be described later). Here, the test specification is, for example, a specification for a type test to determine whether or not a newly developed gaming machine (slot machine) conforms to a predetermined standard. (For setting up a game store). The control program and the like written in the ROM 62 have the same contents regardless of whether they are of the test specification or the mass production specification.

(Each Means Constituting the Game Progress Management Means 130)
The accepted medal management unit 131 is a game medal (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as “inserted game medal”) inserted from the medal insertion slot 21, which is actually accepted (in the present embodiment, guided to the receiving passage). The game medal detected by the inserted medal sensor 28b (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as “accepted game medal”) is controlled to be a game medal to be directly bet or a game medal to be credited. It is configured. In the present embodiment, if the bet number (BET number) does not reach the maximum bet number (in the embodiment, the bet number required for executing the game (the specified number “3”)), the accepted game medal Is a game medal to be directly betted, and when the bet number has reached the maximum allowable bet number and the credit amount has not reached the maximum allowable credit number (“50” in the present embodiment), the accepted game medal is credited. It is configured to be a game medal to be performed.

  In addition, in the game set in the re-game operation state, the accepted medal management unit 131 performs the automatic bet processing (without reducing the number of game medals held by the player, the same number of game medals as the number of bets in the previous game are generated). (A process of setting a bet state). When the number of bets has reached the maximum allowable number of credits and the number of credits has reached the maximum allowable number of credits, the inserted game medals are returned without being accepted.

  When the start lever 25 is operated (the operation of the start lever 25 is effectively received), the combination determining means 132 generates a plurality of combinations based on preset combination determination probabilities (selection probability and winning probability). It is configured to perform a combination determination process for selecting at least one combination determination result number from the combination determination result numbers. This winning combination determination processing is performed by random number lottery using the random number generator 66 and the sampling circuit 67 shown in FIG. Specifically, after a random number (number) is obtained (latched and read) by the sampling circuit 67 from the random number sequence generated by the random number generator 66, the obtained random number is used as a plurality of combination determination result numbers. Is determined to which of the combination determination results corresponds to, and the combination determination result number is selected.

  In the combination determination process, when one combination determination result number is selected, the gaming combination corresponding to the selected combination determination result number becomes the allowed combination combination in the game. Further, information on the selected combination determination result number is stored in a predetermined storage area (described later) of the RAM 63. The area in which the information of the combination determination result number of the bonus is stored is set separately from the area in which the information of the combination determination result number of the winning / RP is stored. In the following, storing the information of the winning combination / RP combination determination result number [commercial combination determination result number] means setting the winning combination / RP combination determination result flag [commercial combination determination result flag] or turning it on. Clearing the information of the memorized prize / RP combination determination result number [commercial combination determination result number] is called clearing the prize / RP combination determination result flag [commercial combination determination result flag] or OFF. And so on.

The information of the winning / RP combination determination result number stored in one game is determined at the time of the end of the game (in this embodiment, a game completion check described later) (As another mode, it is cleared at the start of the next game (for example, at the time of receiving a start lever operation), or the information of the combination determination result number selected in the next game without overwriting is overwritten. Or it is possible). On the other hand, once the information of the winning combination determination result number of the bonus is stored, it is carried over to the next game as it is stored until the special winning combination (BB winning) is established. In the present specification, a state in which the information of the role determination result number of the character is carried over while being stored is referred to as a winning carry-over of the BB role or as an inside BB.

  The game progress information determining means 133 is mainly configured to execute various lotteries for determining information necessary for progressing the game. In the present embodiment, as such a lottery, an AT lottery, an AT precursor G number lottery, and a pressing order game lottery are performed.

  The AT lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to set an AT. When the game mode is set to the game mode 0 or 3, the predetermined lottery determination result number (in this embodiment, the role is set during the game mode 0). Decision result numbers 15 to 22, 48 to 50, and the combination decision result numbers 17 to 22 during the game mode 3 are performed when selected, and each game is performed when the game mode 5 or 7 is set. . The selection items and the selection probabilities in the AT lottery are as shown in FIG. When the AT is won, the AT stock number for identifying the settable number of ATs is incremented by “1” (the counter value set to count the AT stock number (initial value “0”) is “+1”). Will be). As another mode, the selection probability of the AT winning may be set to a different value according to the game mode, or the lottery for determining the selecting probability of the AT winning may be separately performed.

  The AT a precursor G number lottery is a lottery that is performed when an AT is won in the above-described AT lottery in the game mode 0 and that determines the number of games (the number of precursor G) until the AT setting. The selection items and the selection probabilities in the AT precursor G number lottery are as shown in FIG. When the number of precursors G is determined, a counter for counting the number (hereinafter, referred to as “a precursor counter”) is set (the initial value is a value selected in the AT precursor G number lottery), and the next game from the next game, the precursor G The number is decremented by "1" (the value of the precursor counter is decremented by "-1"). As another mode, the number of precursors G may be set uniformly without performing the AT precursor G number lottery, or the precursor G number may not be set.

  In the pressing order game lottery, when the combination determination result numbers 23 to 28 (6 selection pressing order bells) are selected while the above-described game mode 3 is set, the pressing ordering game described later is executed. It is a lottery to determine whether or not. The selection items and selection probabilities in the pressing order game lottery are as shown in FIG.

  The reel control unit 134 confirms that the minimum game time has elapsed after the start lever 25 has been operated (the operation of the start lever 25 has been effectively received), and then the reels 3a to 3e. 3c, the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c are sequentially operated after all the reels that have started to rotate are in the constant-speed rotation state (operations of the stop switches 26a to 26c are effectively received). ), The corresponding reels 3a to 3c are sequentially stopped from rotating.

  The rotation stop control of the reels 3a to 3c is based on stop tables (not shown) that are set (set) in accordance with the combination determination result numbers selected in the combination determination processing, and the operation modes of the stop switches 26a to 26c. (Such as the pressing order and operation timing). Each of the reels 3a to 3c is controlled so that each of the reels 3a to 3c stops within a predetermined allowable stop time (for example, 190 milliseconds) from the timing at which the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c are operated (in this embodiment, The maximum number of sliding frames is 5).

That is, as a result of the combination determination process, when a predetermined game combination is selected as a formation permitted combination,
In the case of a loss, the corresponding symbols of any of the gaming components are activated lines so that the corresponding symbols of the selected gaming components are stopped and displayed on the activated line 29 as much as possible within the range of the stop allowable time. The stop control of the reels 3a to 3c is performed so that the stop display is not performed on the reel 29. In this embodiment, if the replaying role or the small role is won while the BB role is overtaken, the replaying role or the small role is prioritized (the priority order is higher for the replaying role but is changed. Possible) The reel rotation stop control with the replaying game priority given or the small winning combination given priority is performed.

  The stop display symbol determination means 135 determines which symbol is the symbol stopped and displayed by the reels 3a to 3c, and a gaming combination is established from the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed on the activated line 29. It is configured to determine whether the

  When the replaying game is activated, information indicating that the corresponding symbol of the replaying game (hereinafter, also referred to as “replaying operation symbol”) is stopped and displayed on the activated line (as appropriate, “replaying operation symbol display information”). However, when the special combination (BB combination) is established, information indicating that the corresponding design of the BB combination (hereinafter also referred to as “BB operation design”) is stopped and displayed on the activated line (as appropriate) "BB operation symbol display information") is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 63 (described later). Hereinafter, storing the replaying operation symbol display information is referred to as setting or turning on a replaying operation symbol display flag, and clearing the stored replaying operation symbol display information information is referred to as a replaying operation symbol. This is called clearing the display flag or turning it off. Similarly, storing the BB operation symbol display information is referred to as setting or turning on the BB operation symbol display flag, and clearing the stored BB operation symbol display information is clearing the BB operation symbol display flag. Then, it is referred to as turning off. In addition, the re-game operation symbol display flag and the BB operation symbol display flag are collectively referred to as an “operation symbol display flag”. The data of the operation symbol display flag is used for generating data of the above-described operation state flags (re-game operation state flag, BB operation state flag, and RB operation state flag) (details will be described later), and at the time of starting the game of the next game (When the operation of the start lever 25 is received).

  The payout medal management means 136 adds the number of game medals according to the small combination that has been established when the small combination has been established to the credit addition amount when the credit amount has not reached the maximum allowable number of credits. If the credit has reached the maximum allowable number of credits as a result of the payout, the payout is carried out by actual payout in which the hopper 50 is driven via the hopper drive circuit 52. In addition, when the clearing operation (the pressing operation of the clearing switch 24) is effectively received, the payout medal management unit 136 transfers the number of game medals that have been bet or the number of game medals that have been credited to the hopper 50. It is designed to be driven and paid back.

  The blocker control unit 137 outputs a blocker signal for controlling the above-described blocker 48, and switches the blocker 48 between an ON state (a state where game medals can be received) and an OFF state (a state where game medals cannot be received). It is configured as follows. When the blocker 48 is turned off, the game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 are guided to the return passage and returned. However, the insertion of the game medal is detected by the inserted medal sensor 28a.

The display lamp control means 138 includes the various display lamps (MAX-BET display lamp 46a, BET lamp 46b, insertable display lamp 46c, game start display lamp 46d, re-game display lamp 46e, status display lamp 46f, The control for turning on / off the number-of-times display lamp 46g, the CRE lamp 46h, and the WIN lamp 46j) is performed via a display lamp control circuit 47. When the WIN lamp 46j functions as the main-side pressing order alarm, the WIN lamp 46j is controlled by the main-side pressing order management unit 139.

  The main-side pressing order management unit 139 is configured to set a pressing order instruction number (any one of A0 to A9) according to the combination determination result number selected by the combination determination process. A10 is selected as the push order instruction number determined in step (1). In this embodiment, as shown in the pressing order instruction number-corresponding pressing order-display content correspondence table of FIG. 16, each pressing order instruction number is set.

  The pressing order instruction number A0 is selected when the pressing order is not notified, and the corresponding pressing order is “unknown”. The pressing order instruction numbers A1 to A6 are selected when it is desired to notify the first to third pressing orders, and the corresponding pressing orders are set as shown in the table of FIG. For example, the corresponding pressing order of the pressing order instruction number A2 is “left and right middle”, and the corresponding pressing order of the pressing order instruction number A5 is “right and left middle”. Furthermore, the push order instruction numbers A7 to A9 are selected when a later-described push order game is performed, and the corresponding push orders are “left ??” (the first push order is “left”). And the rest is unknown), "middle ??" (first push order is "medium" and the rest is unknown), and "right ??" (first push order is "right" and the rest is unknown). Note that the push order instruction number A10 is not selected by the main push order management means 139, and when the symbol “character” to be aimed by the eye inside the BB is to be notified (there is no corresponding push order), the sub order is not selected. (Sub-control means 200) side.

  The correspondence relationship between the role determination result number selected by the role determination process and the pressing order instruction number selected by the main side pressing order management unit 139 is shown in the table of the role determination result number-push order instruction number correspondence table in FIG. It is as follows. As shown in the figure, the selected push order instruction number differs depending on the combination determination result number selected by the combination determination process in the above-described game modes 2 and 3. For example, when the role determination result number 7 is selected, the pressing order instruction number A1 is selected, and when the role determination result number 32 is selected, the pressing order instruction number A4 is selected. When 15 to 22, 48 to 51 (corresponding to "Others" in the table) are selected, the pressing order instruction number A0 is selected.

  Note that two push order instruction numbers (one is shown in parentheses) are described for the combination determination result numbers 6, 11 to 14, but this is the push order instruction shown in parentheses in this embodiment. The number is selected, but as another aspect, it means that the pressing order instruction number described in parentheses may be selected. Further, regarding the combination determination result numbers 23 to 28, in addition to the push order instruction number selected when the push order game described below is not performed, the push order instruction selected when the push order game is performed is described. The numbers are given in parentheses. For example, when the winning combination determination number 25 is selected, if the pressing order game is not performed, only the pressing order instruction number A3 is selected, and if the pressing order game is performed, the pressing order instruction number A3 is selected. In addition, it indicates that the pressing order instruction number A8 is selected. On the other hand, in the above-mentioned gaming modes 0, 4 to 7, the pressing order instruction number A0 is selected regardless of the combination determination result number selected by the combination determination process.

The main-side pressing order management unit 139 causes the WIN lamp 46j to function as a main-side pressing order indicator, and notifies the selected pressing order instruction number. Specifically, the push order instruction number is notified using two 7-segment lamps (hereinafter, sometimes abbreviated as “7-segment”) provided in the WIN lamp 46j. FIG. 18 shows an example of the notification mode. FIG. 18A shows a mode in which the pressing order instruction number A2 is displayed, in which “=” is displayed in the left 7 seg and “2” is displayed in the right 7 seg. FIG. 18C shows a mode in which the push order instruction number A8 is displayed, in which “=” is displayed in the left 7 seg and “8” is displayed in the right 7 seg. The “=” displayed on the left 7-segment is for distinguishing from the case where the number of payouts is displayed on the WIN lamp 46j. In addition, when the push order instruction number is displayed, the push order instruction number selected corresponding to the push order bell is displayed (in the case of the bell navigation), and the push order selected corresponding to the push order RT transition RP is displayed. When displaying the order designation number (in the case of replay navigation), the display mode may be changed so that it is possible to distinguish which case the same pushing order designation number is. For example, it is conceivable that the position of "=" displayed on the left 7-segment is higher in the case of the bell navigation. When the push order instruction number A0 is selected, the display by the WIN lamp 46j is not performed (see FIG. 16 for the correspondence between each push order instruction number and the display content by the WIN lamp 46j).

As another mode, the display of the push order instruction number by the WIN lamp 46j may be performed in a binary number. For example, as shown on the right side of FIG. 18 (F), the pressing order number and the like are displayed in correspondence with the bits (bits) 0 to 6 when displaying in binary notation with respect to the lamps at each position of 7 seg. . FIG. 18 (F) shows the binary number “0001001” in the left or right 7 segment.
(Corresponding to the push order instruction number A9) is displayed, and the lamp at the corresponding bit position is turned on. As a modified example, the win determination result number may be displayed by the WIN lamp 46j.

  In the present embodiment, switching between when the WIN lamp 46j is used as the main-side pressing order indicator and when it is used as the indicator of the number of game medals to be paid out is performed at the next timing. That is, after displaying the number of payouts in one game, when a betting operation is performed in the next game, the WIN lamp 46j is turned off once. Then, at an arbitrary timing between the time when the start lever 25 is operated and the time when each reel is brought into the constant speed rotation state, the push order instruction number is displayed. Further, when all the reels have stopped, the WIN lamp 46j displaying the push order instruction number is turned off, and thereafter, the payout number is displayed in accordance with the payout processing of the game medals. When the betting operation is performed, the WIN lamp 46j is not turned off, but is switched to a display such as "00". When the operation of the start lever 25 is performed, the pressing order instruction number is displayed from that state. You may do so. Similarly, when switching from the display of the push order instruction number to the display of the number of payouts, the WIN lamp 46j is not turned off, and the display of the push order instruction number is switched to a display such as "00". The number of payouts may be displayed directly from the display or the display of the push order instruction number.

The mask processing means 140 performs a mask process of replacing the information of the winning determination result number of the winning / RP selected by the winning determination process with the information of the effect group number (as another aspect, The mask processing may be performed on the determination result number.) This effect group number is obtained by classifying the winning determination result number of the winning / RP selected by the winning determination process into a plurality of groups (classified according to the type of the winning combination) and corresponding to each group. . The correspondence between the effect group number and the winning / RP combination determination result number is as shown in the effect group number-combination determination result number correspondence table of FIG. As illustrated, in the present embodiment, the effect group numbers 0 to 21 are set as the effect group numbers. Each effect group number is associated with each type of the winning determination result number of the winning / RP selected by the winning determination process. For example, the effect group number 2 is associated with the role determination result numbers 2 to 6 (replay B1 to B6) of the RT shift RP, and the performance group number 11 is the role determination result number 21 ( It is associated with the replay game H2), and the effect group number 15 is associated with the combination determination result numbers 35 to 40 (winning C1 to C6) of the six-selection pressing order bell.

As described above, by performing the mask process of replacing the winning determination result number of the winning / RP selected by the winning determination process with the rendering group number, and transmitting the information of the rendering group number to the sub-control means 200, the following process is performed. There are significant advantages. That is, the sub-control unit 200 may change the color or the content of the background of the image effect according to the type of the gaming role that has been won (winning permitted role) by the winning determination process. For this reason, by associating the effect group number in accordance with the type of the winning determination result number of the winning / RP selected by the role determining process, the sub-control means 200 that has received the information of the effect group number, According to the number information, the content of the image effect can be determined. For example, when the information of the effect group number 19 is received, an effect (strong effect) that gives the player a sense of expectation is performed, and when the information of the effect group number 18 is received, the player expects the effect. It is possible to decide to perform an effect (weak effect) that does not give a feeling.

  Further, by performing such a mask process, there are also the following advantages. The effect group number is one effect for a plurality of role determination result numbers for the role determination result number (push order RT shift RP or push order bell) that is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player depending on the pressing order. Since the group numbers are associated with each other, for example, it is possible to specify whether the player has won the pressing order RT transition RP or the player has won the pressing order bell. It is not possible to specify whether it has been done. That is, in spite of the fact that the pressing order is not reported in the non-AT mode, the information transmission path from the main control means to the sub-control means is illegally accessed and the information of the combination determination result number (correct answer based on the information) is obtained. There is an advantage that it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act of trying to illegally acquire the information on the pressing order). As described above, in the masking process, it is difficult to specify the correct answering order that is advantageous to the player by removing the information on the operation mode (the pushing order) of the stop switch from the information on the selected winning combination / RP combination determination result number. It has the meaning to make. In the present embodiment, when the push order is not notified, information of the push order instruction number A0 (push order unknown) is transmitted, thereby preventing the above-mentioned fraudulent acts. Can be increased.

  Note that the mask processing in the present embodiment does not replace (overwrite) the information of the winning / RP combination determination result number itself selected by the combination determination processing and stored in a predetermined storage area with the effect group number. When the information of the combination determination result number is transmitted to the sub-control means 200, the information of the combination determination result number of the winning / RP stored in the predetermined storage area is read, and the information of the read combination determination result number is added to the information of the read combination determination result number. Based on the information on the effect group number (effect group number command described later), the effect group number command is transmitted to the sub-control means 200 in a buffer (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “CB”. CB is an abbreviation of command buffer). Is set to As described above, by performing the mask processing when transmitting the command, it is not necessary to provide an area for storing the effect group number in the RAM or the like, and thus it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage area. Of course, the information of the effect group number to be transmitted may be generated and stored in advance.

As a modification of the mask processing, a combination determination result number for mask processing may be used instead of the effect group number. The combination determination result number for the mask processing is not selected by the combination determination processing, but the combination determination result number (any one of 0 to 51) selected by the combination determination processing is changed to the combination determination result for the mask processing. It is set to be used in place of a number. The correspondence between the combination determination result number selected by the combination determination process and the combination determination result number for the mask processing can be set, for example, as shown in FIG. In the illustrated example, combination determination result numbers 52 to 73 are set as combination determination result numbers for mask processing (the winning names in the figure are used to facilitate distinguishing each combination determination result number for mask processing). For convenience). The respective combination determination result numbers for the mask processing are associated with each type of combination determination result number selected by the combination determination processing. For example, the combination determination result number 55 (press order RT shift RP2 (mask)) is associated with combination determination result numbers 7 to 11, and the combination determination result number 65 (6 selection pressing order bell 1 (mask)) is combination determination result. For example, it is associated with the numbers 23 to 28. In the case of this modification, the information of the combination determination result number for the mask process associated with the combination determination result number, not the information of the combination determination result number selected by the combination determination process, is transmitted to the sub-control unit 200. Is done. Even when such a combination determination result number for mask processing is used, the same effect as when the effect group number is used can be obtained.

When performing the masking process, it is not necessary to associate one effect group number with a plurality of winning combination determination result numbers with respect to the following winning determination combination numbers of winning / RP.
(1) Combination determination result numbers (for example, combination determination result numbers 1, 15 to 22) of re-gaming combinations that do not affect gaming advantages or disadvantages (have no effect on payouts) due to differences in the pressing order.
(2) Combination determination result numbers of winning combinations (for example, combination determination result numbers 41 and 51) in which there is no difference in the number of game medals obtained due to the difference in the pressing order.
(3) Combination determination result numbers (for example, combination determination result numbers 48 to 50) of winning combinations with a small number of game medals that can be acquired (for example, a number equal to or less than the prescribed number of bets).
(4) The winning combination result number of the winning combination of (2) and (3).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the mask processing is performed irrespective of the game mode or the RT state (this can simplify the control program), but there is no need to notify the pressing order (for example, In the game modes 0, 1, 4, 5, 6, and 7), the mask processing is performed, and in the situation where the pressing order needs to be notified (for example, the game modes 2 and 3), the mask processing is not performed and the combination is determined. The information of the result number may be directly transmitted to the sub control means.

  The pressing order game control means 141 is configured to control the pressing order game. The push order game is a game in which a part or all of the push order that is the correct answer order is hidden and notified, and when the player can execute the correct answer order, a predetermined profit (a game medium) is given to the player. In addition, the setting of the AT, the addition of the number of AT games, etc. In the present embodiment, the addition of the AT stock number) is added. In the present embodiment, in the above-described game mode 3, when the winning is determined in the pressing order game lottery executed when the combination determination result numbers 23 to 28 (6 selection pressing order bells) are selected, the pressing order is applied. The game is set. When the push order game is set, a push order instruction number (any of A7 to A9) for the push order game corresponding to the correct answer order is determined, and the push order corresponding to the push order instruction number is determined. The notification (the notification in a state where at least a part of the pressing order is turned down) is performed. The sub (sub control means 200) recognizes that the pressing order game has been set by receiving the pressing order number for the pressing order game.

  Further, in the pressing order game, each time the player operates the stop switch, it is determined whether or not the answer is the correct order, and if the answer is the correct order, success information indicating the order is given to the secondary control means. Sent to. On the other hand, if the order is not the correct answer pressing order, failure information indicating this is transmitted. Based on the information, the sub-control means 200 determines whether or not the pressing sequence game is successful, and performs an effect (a pressing sequence game success effect or a failure effect) according to the judgment. It has become. It should be noted that the timing of determining whether or not the answer is the correct push order and transmitting the success information or the failure information is based on transmitting the information indicating that the stop switch has been operated, and corresponding to the operated stop switch. Any timing before transmission of information indicating that the reel to be stopped has stopped can be set. On the other hand, the timing may be between transmission of information indicating that the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch has stopped and transmission of information indicating that another stop switch has been operated.

(Each Means Constituting Main Communication Control Means 150)
The control command transmitting means 151 is configured to transmit a control command including various information related to a game at a predetermined timing. For example, as a control command transmitted when the start lever is operated, a control command including information indicating which game mode among the game modes 1 to 7 is set (hereinafter referred to as “game mode” as appropriate) Command), non-RT, a control command including information indicating which RT state among RT1 to RT5 is set (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as an “RT command”), and information on a pressing order instruction number. Control command (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as a “push order instruction number command”), and a control command including information of an effect group number (a winning processing result number of the winning / RP masked) (hereinafter, an “effect group number command” as appropriate) ), A control command including information of the role determination result number of the character (hereinafter, referred to as a “character determination result number command of the character” as appropriate) . In addition, collectively the role determination result number command of the effect group number command and the character object is referred to as a "role determination result command") there is. In addition, a control command including information on the set value, a control command including information on the value of the AT counter, a control command including information on the number of AT stocks, and a control command including information indicating the effect contents to be executed in the sub-control means Or the like may be transmitted in response to the operation of the start lever.

  Further, the control command transmitting unit 151 receives the first stop operation (operation of the stop switch for stopping the first reel) as a trigger, and performs control including information indicating that the first stop operation has been received. A command (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as a “first stop reception command”) is transmitted, and the information of the first cylinder stop is included when the first cylinder stop (stop of the reel corresponding to the first stop operation) is triggered. A control command (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as a “first stop command”) is transmitted. Similarly, when a second stop operation (operation of a stop switch for stopping the second reel) is received, a control command including information indicating that the second stop operation has been received (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as “ A second stop command (hereinafter referred to as “second stop reception command”) is transmitted, and a control command including information on the second stop of the cylinder (hereinafter referred to as appropriate) is triggered by the second stop of the cylinder (stop of the reel corresponding to the second stop operation). (Referred to as "second stop command"). Similarly, when the third stop operation (operation of the stop switch for stopping the third reel) is received, a control command including information indicating that the third stop operation has been received (hereinafter referred to as “first A control command (hereinafter referred to as “3rd stop accepting command”) including information on the 3rd stop of the cylinder (hereinafter referred to as “appropriate“ Third stop command ”). Further, after the stop symbol is determined, a control command including information of a stop display symbol (hereinafter, referred to as a "all stop command" as appropriate because it is used as a command indicating that all the trunks have stopped), a game medal A control command including information on the number of payouts (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as a “number of payouts command”) is transmitted.

  In the present embodiment, when the start lever is operated, the combination determination process is performed to select a combination determination result number, and the pressing order instruction number is determined based on the selected combination determination result number. It has become. However, the command transmission to the sub-control means is such that the pressing order instruction number command is performed earlier than the combination determination result command (the effect group number command and the combination determination result number command of the character). . That is, the information is stored in the predetermined storage area of the RAM before the combination determination result number is performed before the pressing order instruction number, but the information is set in the transmission buffer (CB) according to the pressing order instruction number. The number command is performed before the combination determination result command.

Further, in the present embodiment, the role determination result number command of the character is used as a command indicating that the start lever has been operated, and the sub-control unit receives the role determination result number command of the character. As an opportunity, an effect to be executed when the start lever is operated is started. Thus, there is no need to transmit a command indicating that the start lever has been operated as another command, so that the processing load on the main control unit can be reduced. In addition, as described above, by transmitting the pressing order instruction number command before the combination determination result command, the sub-control unit that receives the control command in this order can perform the rendering processing based on the combination determination result command earlier. In addition, it is possible to start a push order navigation effect or the like, which will be described later, as an effect process based on the push order instruction number command, or to start a push order navigation effect or the like during the effect process based on the combination determination result command. The main control unit 100
Communication between the main control unit 100 and the sub control unit 200 (sub main control unit 200A) can be performed only in one direction from the main control unit 100 to the sub control unit 200 (sub main control unit 200A).

  The outer end signal transmitting means 152 is configured to transmit an outer end signal to a data counter, a hall computer, or the like when a predetermined game state is set. In the present embodiment, a BB signal and an RB signal are transmitted as outer end signals. The BB signal is turned on when the condition for shifting to the game mode 3 (AT) is satisfied, and when the end condition of the game mode 3 (the condition for shifting from the game mode 3 to another game mode) is satisfied. Is turned off. On the other hand, the RB signal is turned on when the BB combination is established, and turned off when the BB game ends. However, when the game mode is shifted to the game mode 3 via the game modes 0 and 1 (non-AT state), the RB signal is turned on together with the BB signal. Also, when the BB signal is ON, the BB signal is not turned off even if the BB combination is won. When the BB combination is established, the BB signal is turned off and the RB signal is turned on. This is because if the BB signal is turned off by the winning of the BB role, the BB signal is turned off even though the end condition of the game mode 3 is not satisfied, so that the player can know that the BB role has been won. It is because. In addition, a display lamp (referred to as a “bonus lamp”) for notifying that the BB combination has been won, which is managed by the main control means, is provided. If the notification has already been performed, the BB combination is established. Even before this, the BB signal may be turned off. However, if not the bonus lamp but the liquid crystal display device managed by the sub-control unit notifies that the BB combination has been won, the BB signal is not turned off.

  When the slot machine 1 has the test specification, the test signal transmitting unit 153 transmits a signal (to collectively refer to each signal) for transmitting various kinds of information for testing to a test apparatus connected to the slot machine 1. (Referred to as a “test signal” as appropriate). The test signals output in the present embodiment include a symbol stop test signal, an operating state test signal, and a winning information test signal. The symbol stop test signal is a signal for transmitting information on the optimal operation mode of each stop switch (information on the pressing order and the pressing position), and is a predetermined output port for serial communication (“test output port SO0 as appropriate”). ) Is output as a serial signal. The operation state test signal is a signal for transmitting the presence / absence of the replay operation state, the presence / absence of the BB operation state, and the presence / absence of the RB operation state, and is a predetermined output port for parallel communication (“test output port PO8” as appropriate). ) Is output as a parallel signal. The winning information test signal is the winning information of the character (consisting of the information of the character determination result number of the character and the information of the identifier for causing the test apparatus to identify the information of the character determination result number of the character), Alternatively, prize / RP winning information (consisting of information on the winning / RP combination determination result number and information on an identifier for causing the test apparatus to identify the information on the winning / RP combination determination result number) is transmitted. And output as a parallel signal from a predetermined output port for parallel communication (referred to as “test output port PO7” as appropriate).

  The symbol stop test signal is output only once (the same signal is output a plurality of times (for example, two times) in succession in a symbol stop test signal output process described below, which is executed when the start lever operation is received). You may do so). On the other hand, the operation state test signal is output every time the timer interrupt processing is executed in the timer interrupt processing described later. The winning information test signal is also output every time the timer interrupt processing is executed. However, the winning information test signal in the state where the actual winning information (information of the combination determination result number) is set (carried) is set. The information test signal is output only for a predetermined period after receiving the start lever operation (suitably referred to as a “winning information output period”), and in other periods, the winning information test in a state where actual winning information is not set is performed. A signal is output (the details will be described later).

  In the present embodiment, test signals other than the above-described test signals will not be described in detail. However, as other test signals, a signal for transmitting an RT setting state (referred to as an “RT information test signal” as appropriate, and described later) A signal for transmitting a lighting state of various display lamps, a signal for transmitting a rotation state of each reel, a signal for transmitting a payout state of game medals, and a set value. And the like for transmitting the information. From the test device, a command signal for betting a game medal, a command signal for starting rotation of all reels, a command signal for stopping rotation of each reel, a command signal for changing a set value, and the like, Each command signal for executing the game is output, and the main control unit 100 and the sub-control unit 200 perform each control process (the same process as that performed in the mass production type) for executing the game according to the command signals. Process).

  On the other hand, the sub-control unit 200 mainly includes a sub-main control unit (also referred to as a “first sub-control unit”) 200A that mainly performs management (instruction) of a lamp effect, an image effect, and a sound effect, and an image effect and a sound effect. A sub-sub-control unit (also referred to as "second sub-control unit") 200B for controlling (executing) the effect is provided.

  The sub-main control unit 200A is roughly provided with an effect management unit 210 and a sub-main communication control unit 230. The effect management unit 210 includes a sub-side pressing order management unit 211, a game effect management unit 212, a notification effect management unit 213, and a lamp effect control unit 214. The sub main communication control unit 230 includes a control command reception unit 231, An effect command transmitting means 232 and a status command receiving means 233 are provided. The above-described units in the sub-main control unit 200A are hardware such as a sub-main CPU 71, a ROM 72, a RAM 73, and an electronic circuit provided on a sub-main control board 70A shown in FIG. It functionally represents what is constituted by software such as.

(Each means constituting the effect management means 210)
When the sub-side pressing order management means 211 is set to any of the game modes 2, 3, 4, and 6, the main control means 100 sends a predetermined combination determination result command and a predetermined pressing order instruction number. When a command is received, a push order instruction number different from the content of the received push order instruction number command can be uniquely determined. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 21, a combination determination result command (effect group number command) including any of the effect group numbers 1, 7 to 12, and a push order instruction including information of the push order instruction number A0. When a number command is received, it is possible to determine any of the pressing order instruction numbers A1 to A6 instead of the pressing order instruction number A0. In the case where a role determination result command including information of the role determination result number 1 of the role (a role determination result number command of the role) and a pressing order instruction number command including information of the pressing order instruction number A0 are received. The push order instruction number A10 can be determined instead of the push order instruction number A0.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the effect group number 1 corresponds to the winning determination result number 1 of the winning RP, which is the normal RP, and the effect group numbers 7 to 9 are the role determining result number 17 which is the pushing order cherry RP. The effect group number 12 corresponds to the role determination result numbers 20 to 22, which are the pressing order chances RP. These winning / RP combination determination result numbers are combination determination result numbers in which the profit obtained by the player's pressing order does not change (becomes advantageous or disadvantageous). Whether to determine another push order instruction number instead of the push order instruction number A0 is left to the judgment of the sub-side push order management unit 211 (the main control unit 100 may give an instruction). ). For example, in game mode 6 (additional specialization preparation), on condition that a situation in which the BB combination is not established continues for several games, a symbol “character” to be aimed at by a push is notified in a game in which a loss determination result is obtained. For example, determining the pressing order instruction number A10 in order to cause this is performed.

  The game effect management means 212 mainly performs the image and sound effects (hereinafter referred to as “game effects”) executed by the sub-sub control means 200B for the purpose of enhancing the interest of the game and enhancing the playability. It is configured to manage based on a control command from the main control means 100. The game effects include, for example, continuous effects, single effects, and assist effects.

  The continuous production is a production that is continuous over a plurality of game periods, and mainly uses the image display device 11 to display an image as a continuous story over a plurality of game periods, One that displays an effect image or the like that symbolizes that an AT is being performed is given. When performing a continuous effect or a single effect described below, effects using the effect lamps 12, 13a, 13b, 14a, 14b and decorative lamps 32a, 32b are performed, or the speakers 15a, 15b, 44a, 44b are used. It may be performed by combining the effects that have been performed.

  The one-shot effect is an effect that is executed only once when a specific situation occurs during the progress of the game. For example, there is an effect of displaying an image that implies the expected degree of winning of the gaming combination by the image display device 11 when each reel rotates. Further, in response to the AT winning in the above-mentioned AT lottery performed by the main control means 100 (the addition of the AT stock number), the value of the added AT stock number (for example, a character such as “+1”) is displayed. The effect displayed on the display screen 11a of the image display device 11 is also an example of the single effect.

  The assist effect is an effect mainly for assisting the player during the AT setting. In the present embodiment, the assist effect is mainly applied to the information of the push order instruction number transmitted by the push order instruction number command from the main control unit 100. Accordingly, a pressing order navigation effect (referred to as the pressing order navigation performed on the sub-control means side) is performed. This push order navigation effect is a one-shot effect in which the liquid crystal display device 11 is used as a sub-side push order indicator, and a push order corresponding to the push order instruction number is displayed on the display screen 11a for the player. (The above-described replay navigation effect as the replay navigation and the bell navigation effect as the bell navigation may be set, and the effect mode of both may be changed). When the pressing order instruction number is independently determined by the sub-control means (the sub-side pressing order management means 211), a pressing order navigation effect is performed according to the pressing order instruction number determined by the sub-control means.

  As a specific mode of the pressing order navigation effect, for example, when the pressing order instruction number A2 (corresponding pressing order “left and right middle”) is determined, as shown in FIG. The numbers shown are arranged side by side in the order of “1, 3, 2” from the left, and when the push order instruction number A8 (the corresponding push order “middle ??”) for the push order game is determined, FIG. As shown in D), a mode in which numbers indicating the first pressing order to be notified and symbols “?” Indicating the second and third pressing orders not to be notified are arranged side by side in the order of “?, 1,?” From the left side. Is given as an example. Further, when the push order instruction number A10 (the symbol to be aimed at “character”) is determined, as shown in FIG. 18E, a mode in which character information “Aim for a character!” Is displayed as an example. (Refer to FIG. 16 for an example of a display mode when other pressing order instruction numbers are determined).

When displaying from the first pressing order to the third pressing order, as shown in FIG. 18 (G), when the player operates the first stop switch in accordance with the displayed first pressing order, the first pressing order is displayed. The display of the first pressing order is erased, the display of the second pressing order is erased when the player operates the second stop switch according to the displayed second pressing order, and the player is displayed at the third pressing order according to the displayed third pressing order. The display of the third pressing order may be erased when the stop switch is operated. Further, when the player operates the stop switch in an order different from the displayed pressing order, the pressing order navigation effect may be immediately terminated. Further, when the pressing order is displayed, the sound of "Naka", the sound of "Hidari", and the sound of "Migi" are output from the speakers 15a, 15b and the like so as to match the operation timing of each stop switch. You may do so.

  The notification effect management means 213 mainly performs the image and sound effects (hereinafter referred to as “information effects”) executed by the sub-sub control means 200B for the purpose of notifying the player of information relating to the game. It is configured to manage based on a control command from the main control means 100. As the notification effect, for example, an error notification effect of notifying that an error has occurred with character information such as "error occurrence" or "image preparation in progress" indicating that an image is being prepared at the time of power-off recovery. An effect of notifying with character information is given.

  The lamp effect control means 214 is configured to control various lighting effects using the effect lamps 12, 13a, 13b, 14a, 14b, the decorative lamps 32a, 32b, and the back lamps 38a to 38d.

(Each Means Constituting the Sub Main Communication Control Means 230)
The control command receiving unit 231 is configured to receive a control command from the main control unit 100 and store it in a predetermined storage area such as the RAM 73 (for example, a command buffer for the received control command).

  Based on the control command from the main control means 100, the effect command transmitting means 232 sub-controls an effect command including various information relating to the effect (for example, an effect command including information on a pressing order number (push order)). It is configured to transmit to the means 200B.

  The status command receiving unit 233 receives a status command (for example, a status command including information indicating that an effect command reception error has occurred) from the sub-sub control unit 200B, and receives the status command from a predetermined storage area (for example, reception (A command buffer for the status command).

  In contrast to the sub-main control means 200A configured as described above, the sub-sub control means 200B is provided with an effect execution control means 250 and a sub-sub communication control means 270. The effect execution control unit 250 includes a game effect execution control unit 251 and a notification effect execution control unit 252. The sub-sub communication control unit 270 includes an effect command receiving unit 271 and a state command transmitting unit 272. The above-described units in the sub-sub-control unit 200B correspond to the sub-sub CPU 75, the ROM 76, the RAM 77, hardware such as an electronic circuit, and software such as a control program stored in the ROM 76 provided on the sub-sub control board 70B shown in FIG. It is a functional representation of what is composed of hardware.

(Each Means Constructing Effect Execution Control Means 250)
The game effect execution control means 251 is configured to control the image display device 11, the speakers 15a, 15b, and the like based on an effect command from the sub-main control means 200A, and execute the above-described game effects.

  The notification effect execution control means 252 is configured to control the image display device 11, the speakers 15a, 15b, and the like based on the effect command from the sub-main control means 200A, and execute the above-described notification effect.

(Each Means Constituting Sub-Sub Communication Control Means 270)
The effect command receiving means 271 is configured to receive an effect command from the sub-main control means 200A and store it in a predetermined storage area such as the RAM 77 (for example, a command buffer for the received effect command).

  The status command transmitting unit 272 is configured to transmit the above-mentioned status command to the sub-main control unit 200A.

  The transmission of the control command from the control command transmitting unit 151, the transmission of the effect command from the effect command transmitting unit 232, and the transmission of the state command from the state command transmitting unit 272 are all performed by a serial communication method (parallel communication). Communication may be performed). Each of the transmitting units 151, 232, and 272 has the same configuration, and performs a command buffer (CB) as a storage area for temporarily storing a command to be transmitted, and performs processing such as writing and reading of the command to be transmitted. A command processing unit for performing the command, and a command transmission unit for transmitting the command by the serial communication.

  The CB has a plurality of storage areas distinguished by respective addresses, and is configured to be able to store 1-byte command data in each storage area. The command processing unit generates command data to be transmitted, writes the command data in the address area indicated by the write pointer of the CB, reads the previously written command data from the address area indicated by the read pointer of the CB, and reads the command data. It is configured to write to a TDR (transmission data register) of the transmission unit. The command transmission unit is configured to transfer the command data written in the TDR to a TSR (transmission shift register), convert the data into a serial data, and transmit the converted data.

  One command in the present embodiment usually has a 2-byte configuration (the checksum has a 1-byte configuration). The communication system is a start-stop synchronization system (asynchronous system), and has one stop bit and one parity bit (even parity) (the communication system and the command configuration can be appropriately changed).

<Notification timing of pressing order>
Next, the timing of the push order notification (push order navigation) in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. As described above, in the slot machine 1, the pressing order to be notified is mainly determined by the main control unit 100 (partially also determined by the sub-control unit 200). It is designed to do both. FIG. 22 shows the basic push order notification timing. Note that “main” and “sub” in the figure and in the following description mean a main control unit and a sub-control unit, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 22, when the start lever is operated, a game mode command (any one of the game modes 1 to 7) and an RT command (any of the non-RT and RT1 to 5) are switched from the main to the sub. Command in the RT state), a pressing order instruction number command (any command of the pressing order instruction numbers A1 to A9 when notifying the pressing order, a command of the pressing order instruction number A0 when not informing), an effect group A number command (any command of the effect group numbers 0 to 21), a role determination result number command of the role (command of the role determination result number 0 or 1 of the role), and the like are transmitted.

  The above-mentioned gaming mode command, RT command, and pressing order instruction number command are within the range indicated by the double-headed arrow in the figure (the pressing order instruction number command has been notified by the main-side pressing order display. In the latter case, the transmission order is arbitrary. However, the rendering group number command and the role determination result number command of the character (as described above, both are collectively referred to as a role determination result command) are transmitted by these commands. Is transmitted before the reel reaches the constant speed rotation (in this embodiment, the combination determination result command is transmitted so as to be surely transmitted until the reel reaches the constant speed rotation). Is transmitted before the rotation starts.)

Further, upon receiving the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation, respectively, the first stop reception command, the second stop reception command, and the third stop reception command are transmitted from the main to the sub. Then, the first stop command, the second stop command, and the third stop command are transmitted from the main to the sub, triggered by the first body stop, the second body stop, and the third body stop, respectively. Further, after the stop symbol is determined, an all stop command is transmitted from the main to the sub.

  When notifying the pressing order, in the main, for example, the pressing order notification is started before transmitting the pressing order instruction number command (see FIG. 23A), and after transmitting the all-body stop command, the above-described operation is performed. Until the number-of-payouts command is transmitted, the pressing order notification ends (see FIG. 22). On the other hand, in the sub, for example, after receiving the pressing order instruction number command, the pressing order is notified before the reel reaches the constant speed rotation (see FIG. 23A), and the third stop receiving command is issued. After the reception, the notification of the pressing order is finished before the third stop command is received (see FIG. 22). As described above, in the present embodiment, the period of the pressing order notification by the main is set to be longer than the period of the pressing order notification by the sub. By starting the pressing order notification by the main first, even if the pressing order number transmitted to the sub is not transmitted correctly and the pressing order notification by the sub is incorrect, the player can correct the pressing order notification by the main. Since it is possible to know the pressing order, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

  In addition, if the pressing order by the player is different from the notified pressing order, the pressing order notification by the sub is terminated midway (may not be terminated). That is, if the pressing order of the second stop operation is different from the notification pressing order, after receiving the second stop accepting command, the pressing order notification is terminated until the second stop command is received, If the pressing order of the one-stop operation is different from the notification pressing order, the pressing order notification ends after the first stop reception command is received and before the first stop command is received. By ending the process in the middle, it is also possible to subsequently perform an effect that informs that the pressing order is different. In the present embodiment, the notification of the pressing order by the main does not end in the middle even if the pressing order by the player is different from the notified pressing order. May be performed), but may be terminated. In this case, it is preferable that after the completion of the notification of the pressing order by the sub or at the same time, the notification of the pressing order by the main is ended. After the pressing order notification by the main is completed, the pressing order notification by the sub may be ended. The start timing of the pressing order notification by the main can be arbitrarily set as long as the start lever is operated and the reels rotate at a constant speed.

  In the present embodiment, the push order notification by the main is basically started by operating the start lever. For example, it is assumed that the reel has started rotating and that the reel has reached the constant speed rotation. As an opportunity, the push order notification can be started. In addition, the notification of the first pressing order is not performed, and if the player answers correctly in the first pressing order, and the second and third pressing orders are notified, the first stop operation is received. At the same time, the push order notification may be started. In addition, in the pressing order notification by the main, when it is determined in the middle that the pressing order by the player is different from the notified pressing order, another pressing order is determined, and switching to the notification of the pressing order is performed. Alternatively, when switching the pressing order notification by the main, the pressing order notification by the sub may be switched.

As an example of changing the start timing of the push order notification, as shown in FIG. 23B, the push order notification by the main and the push order notification by the sub may be started at the same time. Further, as another modification of the start timing of the push order notification, as shown in FIG. 23C, the push order notification by the sub may be started earlier than the push order notification by the main. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the pressing order instruction number A0 (not notified of the pressing order) is determined on the main side, the pressing order instruction number may be independently determined on the sub side. . In this case, the main push order notification is not performed, and only the sub push order notification is performed. it can.

<Circuit configuration of main control board (difference between test specification and mass production specification)>
Next, a case where the slot machine 1 is manufactured as a test specification (specification for receiving a predetermined test) and a case where the slot machine 1 is manufactured as a mass-production specification (specification for installing a game store) are described. Differences in the circuit configuration of the main control board will be described. The main IC shown in FIG. 24 is a one-chip microcomputer on which predetermined circuit components (a main CPU 61, a ROM 62, a RAM 63, an interface circuit, etc.) arranged on the main control board 60 (see FIG. 2) are mounted. , Terminals for parallel signal output D0 to D7, terminals for serial signal TX0 to TX3 (there are terminals dedicated to output and terminals capable of switching input and output), terminals PI0 to PI7 for parallel signal input, and the like. (Other various terminals are provided, but only a part is shown).

  A plurality of parallel signal output ports (two of which are set as the test output ports PO7 and PO8) are provided inside the main IC, and the signal data from each output port is , And output from the terminals D0 to D7. Further, a plurality of serial signal output ports (one of which is set as the test output port SO0) is provided inside the main IC, and a test signal from the test output port SO0 is provided. Is output from the terminal XO0 (a terminal dedicated to output in the present embodiment, but may be a terminal capable of switching input and output). Also, a plurality of input ports for parallel signals are provided inside the main IC, and signal data is input to each of the input ports via the terminals PI0 to PI7.

  The test ICs 1 and 2 and the connectors CN1 and CN2 shown in FIG. 24 are mounted in the case of the test specification, but are not mounted in the case of the mass production specification. In the case of the test specification, the input terminals D0 to D7 of the test IC1 and IC2 are connected to the terminals D0 to D7 of the main IC, and the output terminals Q0 to Q7 of the test IC1 and the test IC2. Output terminals Q0 to Q7 are connected to signal input units 1 to 8 and 9 to 10 of connector CN1, respectively. The signal input unit 2 of the connector CN2 is connected to the terminal TX0 of the main IC. The test signals output from the test output ports PO7 and PO8 (the operation state test signal and the winning information test signal described above) are transmitted via the test ICs 1 and 2, the connector CN1, and a predetermined relay device (not shown). Thus, the data is transmitted to a test device (not shown). A test signal (the above-described symbol stop test signal) output from the test output port SO0 is transmitted to the test device via the connector CN2 and the relay device.

A resistor R1 (for example, a resistance value of 4.7 kΩ) shown in FIG. 24 is mounted between a power supply voltage VCC (for example, a voltage value of 12.5 V) and a terminal PI0 in a test specification (in a case of a mass production specification). Is not mounted) is a pull-up resistor, and the resistor R2 (for example, a resistance value of 0 kΩ) is mounted between the reference potential (0 V) and the terminal PI0 in the case of mass production specification (not mounted in the case of test specification). ) Pull-down resistor. As described above, by changing the mounted resistance (and the mounting position) between the test specification and the mass production specification, the potential of the terminal PI0 becomes high level (hereinafter, “H level”) in the test specification. ) In the case of mass-production specifications, and is configured to be at a low level (hereinafter, referred to as “L level”). In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is determined whether the potential of the terminal PI0 is at the H level or the L level. Based on the determination result, the test specification is at the H level and the mass production specification is at the L level. Is identified.

The resistance value of the resistor R2 can be set to an arbitrary value (for example, a resistance value of 4.7 kΩ) as long as the potential of the terminal PI0 attains an L level when mounted. However, in consideration of the possibility that fraudulent acts, such as short-circuiting the power supply VCC and the terminal PI0, may be performed in order to erroneously recognize the test specification in spite of the fact that it is a mass production specification. , It is preferable to set the resistance value of the resistor R2 as low as possible. If the resistance value of the resistor R2 is low, when the power supply VCC and the terminal PI0 are short-circuited, the current value flowing in the main IC becomes excessively large and the main CPU 61 stops, thereby preventing the game from being illegally performed. This is because it becomes possible. Contrary to the above, a resistor R1 is mounted between the power supply voltage VCC and the terminal PI0 in the case of mass production specification, and a resistor R2 is mounted between the reference potential and the terminal PI0 in the case of test specification. You may do so. In this case, if the potential of the terminal PI0 is at the L level, it may be determined that the terminal is the test specification.

  Further, the resistors R1 and R2 to be mounted are not changed between the test specification and the mass production specification. R1 and R2 are both mounted, and the open / close state of the switch provided between the terminal PI0 and the resistor R2 is switched between the test specification and the mass production specification to identify which specification is used. May be configured. Specifically, the switch is opened in the test specification (the terminal PI0 is pulled up and the potential is at the H level at this time), and closed in the mass production specification (the terminal PI0 is The voltage dividing circuit provided with the resistors R1 and R2 is in a connected state, and the potential is at the L level. When the potential of the terminal PI0 is at the H level, it is a test specification, and when it is at the L level, it is a mass production specification. May be identified. Or, conversely, the switch is closed in the case of the test specification (at this time, the potential of the terminal PI0 is at the L level), and in the case of mass production specification, the switch is in the open state (at this time, the potential of the terminal PI0 is at the H level). If the potential of the terminal PI0 is at the L level, it may be determined that the test specification is used, and if the potential of the terminal PI0 is at the H level, it may be determined that the product is used for mass production. When such a modified example M1 is adopted, a configuration for restricting the operation of the switch (for example, by providing a thickness at a position corresponding to the switch on the board case so as to prevent the switch from being illegally operated, It is preferable to provide a switch that prevents the switch from being opened when the switch is housed in the board case.

Further, as a circuit configuration connected to the terminal PI0, a mode of a modification M2 illustrated in FIG. 25B may be employed. In this modified example M2, four resistors R4 (for example, a resistance value of 13 kΩ), R5 (for example, a resistance value of 0 kΩ), R6 (for example, a resistance value of 62 kΩ), R
7 (for example, a resistance value of 39 kΩ) is connected to the terminal PI0. Of these four resistors, the resistors R4, R6, and R7 remain mounted in both the test specification and the mass-production specification, and the resistor R5 is mounted in the test specification and the mass-production specification. In this case, the voltage dividing circuit is not mounted (that is, the voltage dividing circuit connected to the terminal PI0 is changed between the test specification and the mass production specification). In this example, the potential of the terminal PI0 becomes L level in the case of the test specification in which the resistor R5 is mounted, and becomes H level in the case of the mass production specification in which the resistor R5 is not mounted. If it is the level, it is identified as the test specification, and if it is the H level, it is identified as the mass production specification. Alternatively, on the contrary, the resistor R5 is not mounted in the case of the test specification, but is mounted in the case of the mass production specification. If the level is a level, it may be identified as a mass production specification.

In the modification M2, the potential of the terminal PI0 (= the potential at the point B in the figure) can be calculated as follows.
・ In the case of a voltage divider with a resistor R5, the potential at point A = ((R5 (R6 + R7) / (R5 + R6 + R7)) / (R4 + ((R5 (R6 + R7)) / (R5 + R6 + R7))) × 12.5 = 0 (V)
Potential at point B = potential at point A = 0 (V)
・ In the case of a voltage divider without resistor R5, potential at point A = ((R6 + R7) / (R4 + R6 + R7)) × 12.5 ≒ 11 (V)
Potential at point B = (R7 / (R4 + R6 + R7)) × 12.5 ≒ 4.3 (V))

Further, as a circuit configuration connected to the terminal PI0, an aspect of a modified example M3 illustrated in FIG. 25C may be employed. In this modified example M3, a voltage dividing circuit including three resistors R8 (for example, a resistance value of 1.5 kΩ), R9 (for example, a resistance value of 1 kΩ), and R10 (for example, a resistance value of 0 kΩ) arranged as shown in the figure is used. Connect to terminal PI0. Of these three resistors, the resistors R8 and R9 remain mounted in both the test specification and the mass-production specification, and the resistor R10 is mounted in the test specification and in the case of the mass-production specification. (That is, the voltage dividing circuit connected to the terminal PI0 is replaced between the test specification and the mass production specification). In this example, the potential of the terminal PI0 becomes L level in the case of the test specification in which the resistor R10 is mounted, and becomes H level in the case of the mass production specification in which the resistor R10 is not mounted. If it is the level, it is identified as the test specification, and if it is the H level, it is identified as the mass production specification. Alternatively, on the contrary, the resistor R10 is not mounted in the case of the test specification, but is mounted in the case of the mass production specification. If the level is a level, it may be identified as a mass production specification.

In the modification M3, the potential of the terminal PI0 (= the potential at the point C in the drawing) can be calculated as follows.
・ In the case of a voltage divider with a resistor R10, the potential at point C = ((R9R10) / (R9 + R10)) / (R8 + (R9R10) / (R9 + R10))) × 12.5 = 0 ( V)
-In the case of a voltage divider circuit without the resistor R10, the potential at point C = (R9 / (R8 + R9)) x 12.5 = 5 (V)

  In the case of a configuration in which a pull-up resistor or a pull-down resistor is connected to the terminal PI0, it is necessary to replace the resistor mounted on the board depending on whether it is a test specification or a mass production specification. On the other hand, in the case of the modified examples M2 and M3, only a part of the plurality of resistors to be mounted in the test specification need not be mounted in the mass production specification, so that the manufacturing process is simplified. There is an advantage of gaining. Of course, in the case of the modified examples M2 and M3, the resistance mounted on the substrate is changed depending on whether it is the test specification or the mass production specification, and thereby the voltage dividing circuit connected to the terminal PI0 is changed. It may be. Further, the specific configuration of the voltage dividing circuit may be of any mode.

<Information storage area>
Next, an information storage area in the main control unit of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 26, a first PRG area and a second PRG area are set in a ROM (ROM 62 in FIG. 2) (PRG is an abbreviation for a program). The first PRG area stores a control program (eg, a program for determining a winning combination or a reel control) relating to the normal progress of a game, and data (eg, a winning lottery table, a symbol stop table, etc.) used in the control program. Area. The second PRG area includes a control program for preventing fraudulent activities, a control program for testing (such as a program for transmitting a test signal), and data used in the control program (such as a stop reception designation table described later). Is an area where is stored. Of course, there is no problem in storing these in the first PRG area even with a control program for preventing fraud or a control program for testing.

On the other hand, a first PRG area corresponding area and a second PRG area corresponding area are set in the RAM (RAM 63 in FIG. 2). The first PRG area corresponding area is a storage area mainly used by a control program stored in the first PRG area, and the second PRG area corresponding area is mainly used by a control program stored in the second PRG area. Storage area. In the control program stored in the first PRG area, both writing (including change) and reading of data are permitted in the first PRG area corresponding area, but data writing is performed in the second PRG area corresponding area. Is not permitted and only reading is permitted. Similarly, in the control program stored in the second PRG area, both writing and reading of data are permitted in the area corresponding to the second PRG area, but writing of data is permitted in the area corresponding to the first PRG area. Instead, only reading is permitted. In the case where the processing is shifted from the processing by the control program stored in the first PRG area to the processing by the control program stored in the second PRG area, the interruption is prohibited and the processing is performed in the first PRG area. (Except for the case where the processing is shifted from the processing by the control program to the processing by the control program stored in the second PRG area), and the information stored in each register before the shift is protected (evacuated). Further, when returning from the processing by the control program stored in the second PRG area to the processing by the control program stored in the first PRG area, an interrupt is permitted and the processing performed by the control program stored in the second PRG area in the timer interrupt processing is stopped. Except for the case where the processing shifts from the processing by the control program to the processing by the control program stored in the first PRG area), the information of each protected register is restored.

  In the present embodiment, each storage area (address area) shown in FIG. 27 is set in the first PRG area corresponding area. The operation state flag storage area (address number “F01CH” (the last “H” means hexadecimal) in the RAM) shown in FIG. 9A corresponds to the operation state flag described above. , Is set as an area for storing information on whether or not the game is in the re-game operation state, whether or not the BB operation state, and whether or not the RB operation state. Bit 0 of the operation state flag storage area corresponds to the replay operation state flag described above. Storing the information of “1” in this bit 0 corresponds to setting (ON) the replay operation state flag described above, and storing the information of “0” sets the replay operation state flag. This is equivalent to clearing (OFF). Further, bit 3 of the operation state flag storage area corresponds to the BB operation state flag described above. Storing the information “1” in this bit 3 corresponds to setting (ON) the above-mentioned BB operation state flag, and storing the information “0” clears the BB operation state flag ( OFF). Further, bit 4 of the operation state flag storage area corresponds to the aforementioned RB operation state flag. Storing the information “1” in this bit 4 corresponds to setting (ON) the RB operation state flag described above, and storing the information “0” clears the RB operation state flag ( OFF). In this embodiment, bits 7 to 5, 2, and 1 of the operation state flag storage area are unused areas, and are always in a state where information of “0” is stored (cleared state).

  The operation symbol display flag storage area (referred to as an address number “F043H” in the RAM) shown in FIG. 27B corresponds to the above-described operation symbol display flag, and indicates whether the re-game operation symbol has been displayed. Or, it is set as an area for storing information on whether or not the BB operation symbol is displayed. Bit 0 of the operation symbol display flag storage area corresponds to the replay operation symbol display flag described above. Storing the information of “1” in this bit 0 corresponds to setting (ON) the re-game operation symbol display flag, and storing the information of “0” sets the re-game operation symbol display flag. This is equivalent to clearing (OFF). Further, bit 3 of the operation symbol display flag storage area corresponds to the BB operation symbol display flag described above. Storing the information “1” in this bit 3 corresponds to setting (ON) the BB operation symbol display flag, and storing the information “0” clears the BB operation symbol display flag ( OFF). In this embodiment, bits 7 to 4, 2, and 1 of the operation state flag storage area are unused areas, and are always in a state where information of “0” is stored (cleared state).

The winning / RP combination determination result number storage area (address number “F048H” in the RAM) shown in FIG. 27C is an area for storing the information of the winning / RP combination determination result number described above. . Bits 5 to 0 of the winning / RP combination determination result number storage area correspond to the above-described winning / RP combination determination result flag. Then, in these bits 5 to 0, numerical data (binary numerical data. For example, if the combination determination result number is 17, “17” = “010001B”). ("B" means a binary number) is equivalent to setting (ON) the winning / RP combination determination result number flag, and storing information of "0" in all of bits 5 to 0. Is equivalent to clearing (OFF) the winning / RP combination determination result number flag. In the present embodiment, bits 7 and 6 of the winning / RP combination determination result number storage area are unused areas, and are always in a state where information of “0” is stored (cleared state).

  The accessory role determination result number storage area (address number “F049H” in the RAM) illustrated in FIG. Bit 0 of the accessory combination determination result number storage area corresponds to the above-described accessory combination determination result flag. Storing the information of “1” in this bit 0 corresponds to setting (ON) the character combination determination result number flag, and storing the information of “0” corresponds to the character combination determination result. This corresponds to clearing (OFF) the number flag. In this embodiment, bits 7 to 1 of the accessory combination determination result number storage area are unused areas, and are always in a state where information of “0” is stored (cleared state).

  The push order instruction number storage area (address number “F0B8H” in the RAM) shown in FIG. 27E is an area in which information on the selected push order instruction numbers A0 to A9 is stored. In this push order instruction number storage area, bits 3 to 0 contain numerical data of push order instruction numbers A0 to A9 (binary numerical data. For example, if push order instruction number A3 is “3” = “0011B”). In the case of the push order instruction number A6, storing “6” = “0110B”) corresponds to storing the information of the push order instruction number. In the case of the push order instruction number A0, the numerical data “0” = “0000B” is stored in bits 3 to 0, which is the same as the state where bits 3 to 0 are cleared. Since the numerical data stored in the push order instruction number storage area is cleared at the end of the game, in this embodiment, when the push order instruction number A0 is selected (the push order instruction numbers A1 to A9). Is not selected), the process of storing the numerical data “0” is not performed (may be performed). In the present embodiment, bits 7 to 4 of the push order instruction number storage area are unused areas, and are always in a state where information of “0” is stored (cleared state).

  Although not particularly shown, in order to cope with the case where the pressing order instruction numbers A7 to A9 are selected, in addition to the above-mentioned pressing order instruction number storage area, another information on the pressing order instruction numbers A1 to A6 is stored. A storage area (hereinafter referred to as a “push order determination storage area”) is set. The pressing order instruction numbers A7 to A9 are selected in the gaming mode 3, and are selected in the above-described pressing ordering game which is performed when any of the combination determination result numbers 23 to 28 is selected by the combination determination process. If any of the combination determination result numbers 23 to 28 is selected, regardless of whether or not the player has won the pressing order game, any one of the pressing order instruction numbers A1 to A6 is selected. Is to be elected first. Therefore, two pushes, a normal push order instruction number (any one of the push order instruction numbers A1 to A6) and a push order instruction number for the push order assignment game (any one of the push order instruction numbers A7 to A9). A state occurs where the order designation number is selected.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a normal push order instruction number (any of A1 to A6) can be stored not only in the above-described push order instruction number storage area but also in a push order determination storage area. If a push order instruction number (any of A7 to A9) for the push order assignment game is selected, information on the normal push order instruction number stored in the push order instruction number storage area earlier than that is selected. Is replaced with the information of the push order instruction number for the push order application game, while the information of the normal push order instruction number stored in the push order determination storage area is held as it is. The information of the push order instruction number stored in the push order instruction number storage area is used when notifying the push order (in particular, the push order instruction number for the push order assignment game is used when notifying the push order in the push order assignment game). ), And the information of the push order instruction number stored in the push order determination storage area is used to determine whether or not a correct answer has been made to the push order game. When storing the information of the normal pressing order instruction number in the pressing order instruction number storage area, the same information should be stored in the pressing order determination storage area. Can be. On the other hand, when a normal pressing order instruction number is selected, the information is stored only in the pressing order instruction number storage area, and when the pressing order instruction number for the pressing ordering game is selected, the pressing order instruction number is selected. The information of the normal push order instruction number stored in the storage area is transferred to the push order determination storage area, and the information of the push order instruction number for the push order game is stored in the push order instruction number storage area. You may.

  The winning information output period timer storage area (address number “F030H” in the RAM) shown in FIG. 27F stores the above-mentioned winning information test signal (actual winning information) when the slot machine 1 has the test specification. The timer value of a timer (referred to as a “winning information output period timer”) set to identify whether or not it is a period (the above-described winning information output period) in which the information is set is output. This is an area where information is stored. In the winning information output period timer storage area, bits 4 to 0 store the timer value (binary value) information of the above-mentioned winning information output period timer (information of “25” when the timer is set; Each time the embedding process is executed, a value obtained by sequentially subtracting “1” (information of “24” to “0”) is stored. In the present embodiment, bits 7 to 5 of the winning information output period timer storage area are unused areas, and are always in a state where information of “0” is stored (cleared state). The winning information output period corresponds to a period (= 2,235 ms × 24 = 53.64 ms) in which a timer interrupt process described later is executed 24 times.

  When the slot machine 1 has the test specification, the information of the winning / RP combination determination result number stored in the winning / RP combination determination result number storage area is the information of the winning / RP combination determination result number in the test apparatus. The information of the identifier (referred to as “winning / RP identifier” as appropriate) for identifying the presence is added to constitute the above-mentioned winning / RP winning information, and the above-mentioned winning information test is performed from the aforementioned test output port PO7. It is output to the test equipment as a signal. Specifically, the winning / RP winning information is composed of 8-bit data, the upper 2 bits are data of the winning / RP identifier, and the lower 6 bits are data of winning / RP combination determination result number. You. When the winning / RP winning information is output as a winning information test signal, as shown in FIG. 28A, each bit D7 to D0 of the test output port PO7 (terminal D7 of the main IC shown in FIG. 24). To D0), bits D5 to D0 contain data of the winning / RP combination determination result number (“0”) stored in bits 5 to 0 of the winning / RP combination determination result number storage area. To "51"), and the data of the winning / RP identifier ("0" in bit D7 and "1" in bit D6) are set in bits D7 and D6. .

  Similarly, the information of the role determination result number of the role stored in the role determination result number storage area is an identifier for causing the test apparatus to identify the information of the role determination result number of the role (optionally The information is referred to as “winning item identifier”) and is configured as the above-mentioned winning item winning information, and is output from the test output port PO7 to the testing device as the above-mentioned winning information test signal. Specifically, the character winning information is composed of 8-bit data, the upper two bits being data of the above-mentioned character identifier, and the lower six bits being data of the character determination result number of the character. When the winning item winning information is output as a winning information test signal, as shown in FIG. The data of bits 5 to 0 of the character combination determination result number storage area are set (bit D0 is data of the character determination result number of the character (“1” or “0”), and bits D5 to D1 are “0”. Data is set), and the data of the identifier of the accessory (data of “1” in bit D7 and data of “0” in bit D6) are set in bits D7 and D6.

Further, when the slot machine 1 has the test specification, whether or not the re-game operation state is stored in the operation state flag storage area (whether the above-described re-game operation state flag is ON or OFF), and the BB operation state (Information on whether the above-mentioned BB operation state flag is ON or OFF) and information on whether or not the RB operation state (whether the above-mentioned RB operation state flag is ON or OFF) The information is referred to as “operating state test signal” from the test output port PO8 to the test apparatus. Specifically, the operation state flag information is composed of 8-bit data, and the least significant bit is the ON / OFF data (“1” or “0”) of the replay operation state flag. The fourth bit is ON / O of the BB operation status flag.
FF data ("1" or "0"), and the fifth bit is the ON / OFF of the RB operation state flag.
OFF data (“1” or “0”). When the operation state flag information is output as the operation state test signal, as shown in FIG. 28C, the bits D7 to D0 of the test output port PO8 are replaced with the bits of the operation state flag storage area. Data of 7 to 0 are set (bit D4 is the ON / OFF data of the RB operation state flag, bit D3 is the ON / OFF data of the BB operation state flag, and bit D0 is the data of the replay operation state flag. O
N / OFF data and "0" data are set in bits D7 to D5, D2, and D1).

  As described above, in this embodiment, the information of the winning / RP combination determination result number stored in the winning / RP combination determination result number storage area is added with the information of the winning / RP identifier, and the winning / RP winning information is changed. It is output from the test output port PO7 to the test apparatus as a winning information test signal (the same applies to the winning item winning information). However, the area for storing the winning / RP winning information and the winning item winning information is described. Is not provided. This is effective in that when the storage capacity of the RAM is small, an increase in the storage area used can be suppressed. On the other hand, as a modified example, an area for storing the winning / RP winning information and the winning accessory information may be provided in the RAM. FIG. 29 (A) shows an example in which a winning / RP winning information storage area (address number “F04CH” in the RAM) for storing winning / RP winning information is set in the RAM, FIG. 29 (B) Shows an example in which a bonus item winning information storage area (address number “F04DH” in the RAM) for storing the bonus item winning information is set in the RAM.

  In the present embodiment, when the stop reception designation table T1 shown in FIG. 30A and the stop reception designation table T2 shown in FIG. 30B are stored in the second PRG region of the ROM, the region is set. Have been. As shown in FIG. 30, the stop reception designation table T1 includes 24 consecutive address areas (address numbers "** 00H" to "** 27H" in the ROM (* indicates " 0H ”to“ FH ”), and the stop acceptance designation table T2 is composed of four consecutive address areas (address numbers“ ** ”in the ROM) in the second PRG area of the ROM. 30H ”to“ ** 33H ”).

The stop reception designation table T1 outputs the above-described symbol stop test signal (a signal for transmitting information on the optimal pressing order and the pressing position) to the test device when the BB is not in the BB operating state (BB is not operating). Is a table that is referred to. In the stop reception designation table T1, the four storage areas from the address numbers "** 00H" to "** 03H" store the optimum pressing order and the pressing position corresponding to the pressing order instruction number A0 (the pressing order is unknown). Information is stored. Specifically, in the storage area of the address number “** 00H”, data of “0” corresponding to the numerical value (optimal pressing order) of the pressing order instruction number A0 is stored, and the data of the address number “** 01H” is stored. In the storage area, data of a left reel stop accepting position (optimal pushing position on the left reel) is stored. Similarly, in the storage area of the address number “** 02H”, the data of the middle reel stop accepting position (the optimal pressing position on the middle reel) is stored, and in the storage area of the address number “** 03H”, the right reel stop is stored. Data on the receiving position (the optimal pressing position on the right reel) is stored. The data of the left reel stop reception position is the symbol number (
In this embodiment, the data is “3”). This is because when the push order instruction number A0 is selected during the non-operation of the BB, the symbol stops when the symbol of symbol number 3 on the left reel is at a predetermined position (the upper position in the display window W). This means that the operation is optimal (the probability of the formation of the gaming combination is highest) (the same applies to the data of the middle reel stop reception position and the data of the right reel stop reception position).

  Further, in the four storage areas (address numbers “** 04H” to “** 07H”) following the four storage areas corresponding to the push order instruction number A0, the push order instruction number A1 (“left center right”) is stored. The information of the optimal pressing order and the pressing position corresponding to is stored in the following four storage areas (address numbers “** 08H” to “** 0BH”), and the pressing order designation number A2 (“left and right middle”) In the stop reception designation table T1, the information of the optimal pressing order and the pressing position corresponding to each of the pressing order designation numbers A0 to A9 is such that the information of the optimal pressing order and the pressing position corresponding to the information is stored. It is stored in each of four consecutive storage areas. The storage data of “127” in the stop reception designation table T1 means that the optimal pressing position is an arbitrary position (there is no advantage or disadvantage depending on the pressing position).

  On the other hand, the stop reception designation table T2 is a table referred to for outputting the symbol stop test signal to the test device during the BB operation. In the stop reception designation table T2, the four storage areas from the address numbers "** 30H" to "** 33H" store the optimum pressing order and the pressing position corresponding to the pressing order instruction number A0 (push order unknown). Information is stored. Specifically, in the storage area of the address number “** 30H”, data of “0” corresponding to the numerical value of the pressing order instruction number A0 is stored, and the address numbers “** 31H” to “** 33H” are stored. Each data of the left reel stop reception position, the middle reel stop reception position, and the right reel stop reception position (all are “127”) is stored in the storage areas up to.

<Test signal output timing>
Next, the output timing of the above-described test signal will be described. As outlined above, the winning information test signal is subjected to a timer interrupt process in a later-described timer interrupt process which is executed every predetermined time (for example, 2.235 milliseconds). Each time, the winning information test signal in which actual winning information is set is output only during the above-described winning information output period. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 31 (A), the winning information is set in the above-described winning information output period timer, and only during the period when the timer value is from “24” to “13”, Is set to the test output port PO7 and is output to the test apparatus as a winning information test signal a total of 12 times. On the other hand, the winning / RP winning information is set to the test output port PO7 in each timer interrupt process executed during the period when the timer value of the winning information output period timer is between "12" and "1". Similarly, a total of 12 times are output to the test apparatus as a winning information test signal. That is, the period from the timer value of the winning information output period timer of "24" to "1" is the winning information output period, and in other periods, the winning information in the state where the actual winning information is not set is set. A test signal (for example, a signal of “00000000B”) is output.

In the reel rotation start preparation processing described later, the above-mentioned winning information output period timer is required to secure a minimum game time (from the start of rotation of the reel in one game to the start of rotation of the reel in the next game). It is set after confirming that the time (for example, 4.1 seconds) that must be consumed has elapsed. For this reason, in one winning information output period, from the time when the winning information test signal in which the character winning information is set is output first, in the next winning information outputting period, the winning information in which the character winning information is set is set. The time until the test signal is first output is naturally longer than the minimum game time. Therefore, in the test device, it is possible to confirm that the minimum game time is secured by checking at which timing the winning information test signal in which the character winning information is set is output. Become. Therefore, it is not necessary to output another signal indicating that the minimum game time is secured to the test device (this makes it possible to reduce the load on the control process).

  Similarly to the winning information test signal, the operation state test signal is output each time the timer interrupt processing is executed. However, the replay operation state flag, BB set in the operation state test signal is set. The operation state flag and the RB operation state flag are turned ON / OFF at the following timings. That is, as shown in FIG. 31 (B), the re-game operation state flag is set from OFF to ON in a later-described game start process in the game after the re-game operation symbol is displayed, and when the game is completed (described later). It is turned off in the game end check processing). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 31 (C), the BB operation state flag is set from OFF to ON in the game start processing in the game after the BB operation symbol is displayed, and at the same time, the RB operation state flag is also changed from OFF to ON. Is set.

The BB operation state flag once set to ON is continuously turned ON until the end condition of the BB game (payout of more than 450 game medals) is satisfied. On the other hand, after the RB operation state flag is set to ON together with the BB operation state flag, the RB operation state flag is temporarily switched OFF every two games (every time the RB game end condition is satisfied) and is set to ON again. . Between the time the RB operation state flag is switched OFF and the time the RB operation state flag is set ON again, the above-described waiting time (freeze) at the end of the RB operation is set. In the embodiment, the period is set as a period (= 2.235 ms × 5 ≒ 11 ms) in which a timer interrupt process described later is executed five times. That is, during the standby time at the end of the RB operation, the BB operation state flag is set to ON and the RB operation state flag is set to OFF. An operation state test signal carrying information is output from the test output port PO8 a total of five times. On the other hand, during this time, the game progress control processing described later is not executed, and no game operation is accepted.

Note that the standby time at the end of the RB operation is for causing the test apparatus to recognize that the RB game is operating continuously (intermittently) while the RB game is temporarily inactive during the BB operation. Can be set to However, the standby time at the end of the RB operation is set even in the case of the mass production specification (may not be set in the case of the mass production specification), and the freeze during the standby time at the end of the RB operation is: Since this is different from the general freeze that is set to cause the player to recognize the effect of the performance, it is a short period of time in which the player does not feel uncomfortable (cannot recognize that the player is in a freeze) (For example, about 2.235 × 2 ~ 25 ≒ 4.5 ~ 56ms)
It is preferable to set The above-mentioned standby time at the end of the RB operation (≒ 11 ms) is a short time during which the player does not feel uncomfortable in the mass production specification, and the test apparatus correctly recognizes the OFF period of the RB operation state flag in the test specification. It is set as enough time to get.

The symbol stop test signal is output in a symbol stop test signal output process described later. In the present embodiment, the symbol stop test signal output process is performed after the start lever operation is received (actually, after the signal (game start command signal) transmitted from the test device and indicating that the start lever has been operated is received). ), And is performed before executing a process of determining whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed (performed in a reel rotation start preparation process described later). This has the following advantages. That is, in a test such as a type test, the symbol stop test signal may be required to be output within a predetermined time after receiving the game start command signal, but the predetermined time is set shorter than the minimum game time. (Eg, 2 seconds). On the other hand, in the test, if the game is played in the shortest time, the time from receiving the game start command signal to receiving the next game start command signal is, for example, about 1 second, which is considerably shorter than the minimum game time. there is a possibility. In that case, if the symbol stop test signal output process is performed after the process of determining whether the minimum game time has elapsed, there is a possibility that the request for the output timing of the symbol stop test signal may not be met. In contrast, by performing the processing before determining whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed, it is possible to sufficiently meet such a request. In addition, while it is necessary to execute various control processes after the process of determining whether the minimum game time has elapsed, in the test, after receiving the game start command signal, the next game start command is executed. Since the time until the signal is received is shortened, there is a time margin after the game start command signal is received and before the minimum game time elapses. Therefore, even if the symbol stop test signal output process is performed before the process of determining whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed, the processing load can be reduced.

[Main control processing]
Hereinafter, main control processing performed in the above-described slot machine 1 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. First, among the control processes performed by the main control means 100, the test specification determination preparation process, the game progress control process, and the timer interrupt process will be described below with reference to FIGS. Next, with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52, among various control processes performed in the sub main control unit 200A, particularly, a program start process, a sub main loop process, and a power cutoff process will be described.

<Test specification judgment preparation processing>
The test specification determination preparation process is a process performed when the power is turned on. As shown in FIG. 32A, first, an input port is read (step R11). In this input port reading, reading of each potential level of the terminals PI0 to PI7 is particularly performed. Next, it is determined whether or not the potential of the terminal PI0 is at the test level (step R12). The test level refers to a level (H level or L level) set as the potential level of the terminal PI0 when the slot machine 1 has the test specifications. That is, if the terminal PI0 is set to the H level in the test specification, the test level is H level, and if the terminal PI0 is set to the L level in the test specification, the test level is That is, the L level. If it is determined in step R12 that the potential of the terminal PI0 is at the test level, the under-test flag (flag for identifying whether the potential of the terminal PI0 at power-on is at the test level) is turned on. (Step R13) and returns. If the level is not the test level, the flow returns without setting the test-in-progress flag.

  Note that, as in a modification J1 shown in FIG. 32B, in the test specification determination preparation processing, processing including checking the potential level of the terminal PI0 may be omitted. Further, as in the modification J2 shown in FIG. 32C, the under test flag is not set, and the potential level (H level or L level) of the terminal PI0 is stored in a predetermined storage area such as a RAM (RAM 63). (Step R14A).

<Game progress control processing>
The game progress control process described next is a basic process repeatedly executed during the game, and first, a game start process is performed as shown in FIG. 33 (step S1). In this game start process, as shown in FIG. 34, first, information on a symbol combination display flag is obtained (step S31). Specifically, the data value (the data value of the operation symbol display flag) stored in the operation symbol display flag storage area (see FIG. 27B) is stored in an A register (a register provided in the main CPU 61. Each of the following registers) Is the same). Next, it is determined whether the BB operation symbol is displayed in the previous game (step S32). Here, if the BB operation symbol is displayed, data on the number of game medals that can be obtained (“450”) at the time of BB operation (at the start of operation) is stored in a predetermined storage area (step S33), and the process proceeds to step S34. If the BB operation symbol is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S33 without performing the process of step S33.
Proceed to 34.

In step S34, data of the operation state flag is generated. Specifically, the following processes (1) to (5) are performed.
(1) The data of the address of the operation state flag storage area (see FIG. 27A) is stored in the HL register. Specifically, since the address of the operation symbol display flag storage area is “F01CH”, the H register value = “F0H” and the L register value = “1CH”.
(2) The data value stored in the A register (= data value of the operation symbol display flag) and the data value stored in the storage area of the address stored in the HL register (= operation state flag storage area) = Data value of the operation state flag) and the result of the OR operation is stored in the A register.
(3) The data value stored in the A register (= the data value obtained by the OR operation) is stored in the C register.
(4) Data value of bit 3 (= BB value) in the data value stored in the A register (= data value obtained by the above OR operation) and the data value of the operation symbol display flag (= data value of 8 bits) An AND operation is performed on an 8-bit data value (= “00001000B”) in which the data value corresponding to the operation symbol display flag is set to “1” and the data values of the other bits are set to “0”, and the calculation result is A Store in a register.
(5) The data value stored in the A register (= the data value obtained by the AND operation) is shifted left by one bit, and the calculation result is stored in the A register.

  After the processing in step S34, the operation state flag is updated (step S35). Specifically, after the process of (5) in step S34, a process of performing an OR operation on the data value stored in the A register and the data value stored in the C register and storing the result in the A register is performed. . Next, the updated operation state flag is stored (step S36). Specifically, a process of storing the data value stored in the A register in the storage area (= operation state flag storage area) of the address stored in the HL register is performed. As a result, the information of the operating state flag up to that time is replaced with the updated information of the operating state flag.

As a specific example of the processing of (2) to (5) in step S34 and the processing of steps S35 and S36, when a BB operation symbol is displayed in the previous game (hereinafter, referred to as “specific example 1”) When the BB operation symbol is already displayed and the BB and RB operations are being performed (hereinafter, referred to as “specific example 2”), the BB operation symbol is already displayed and the BB operation is being performed but the RB is not operating ( (Hereinafter referred to as "Specific Example 3"), how the values of the registers change will be described.
[Specific example 1]
(Step S34)
(2) A register value: "00001000B"
Data value at address stored in HL register: "00000000B"
A register value after OR operation: "00001000B"
(3) A register value: "00001000B"
C register value: "00001000B"
(4) A register value: "00001000B"
Data value when bit 3 is “1” and other bits are “0”: “00001000B”
A register value after AND operation: "00001000B"
(5) A register value (before left shift): "00001000B"
A register value (after left shift): "00010000B"
(Step S35)
A register value: "00010000B"
C register value: "00001000B"
A register value (after OR operation): "00011000B"
(Step S36)
Data value at address stored in HL register: "00011000B"
[Example 2]
(Step S34)
(2) A register value: "00000000B"
Data value at address stored in HL register: "00011000B"
A register value after OR operation: "00011000B"
(3) A register value: "00011000B"
C register value: "00011000B"
(4) A register value: "00011000B"
Data value when bit 3 is “1” and other bits are “0”: “00001000B”
A register value after AND operation: "00001000B"
(5) A register value (before left shift): "00001000B"
A register value (after left shift): "00010000B"
(Step S35)
A register value: "00010000B"
C register value: "00011000B"
A register value (after OR operation): "00011000B"
(Step S36)
Data value at address stored in HL register: "00011000B"
[Specific example 3]
(Step S34)
(2) A register value: "00000000B"
Data value at the address stored in the HL register: "00001000B"
A register value after OR operation: "00001000B"
(3) A register value: "00001000B"
C register value: "00001000B"
(4) A register value: "00001000B"
Data value when bit 3 is “1” and other bits are “0”: “00001000B”
A register value after AND operation: "00001000B"
(5) A register value (before left shift): "00001000B"
A register value (after left shift): "00010000B"
(Step S35)
A register value: "00010000B"
C register value: "00001000B"
A register value (after OR operation): "00011000B"
(Step S36)
Data value at address stored in HL register: "00011000B"

  Next, it is determined whether or not the RB operation has been started (step S37). Specifically, an XOR operation is performed on the data value stored in the A register and the data value stored in the C register, and a zero flag (set to a specific bit of the F register, and the result of the operation is “0”) If so, the data of "1" is stored), but it is determined whether or not it is "1". Here, if the zero flag ≠ “1”, it is determined that the RB operation has been started, and the process proceeds to step S38. If the zero flag = “1”, the process does not proceed to step S38 and returns. In this step S38, information on the number of possible games (two times) and the number of possible prizes (two times) during the RB operation is stored. Specifically, data of “2” is stored in each of the RB game possible number counter and the RB winning possible number counter set in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 63.

  With the return from the game start processing, the process proceeds to step S2 in FIG. 33, and game medal management is performed. Specifically, when a game medal is inserted (care) or a bet switch is operated by a player, the number of bets or credits (reserved) is managed, and when a clearing switch is operated, Then, a clearing process for refunding the betting game medals or the stored game medals is performed. When the game is in the re-game operation state, an automatic bet process is performed to set the same number of game medals as the number of bets in the previous game.

  After performing the game medal management, the process proceeds to step S3. Therefore, it is determined whether the bet number matches the specified number and whether the operation of the start lever has been received. If the determination here is correct, the process proceeds to step S4, and if not, the process returns to step S2. In step S4, the blocker is turned off, and the process proceeds to step S5.

  In this step S5, a combination determination process is performed. Specifically, first, a random number latch for selecting one random number from a random number sequence generated by the random number generator 66 or the like is performed. Next, the latched random number (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as “latch random number”) is read, and one winning determination result number is selected based on the read latch random number and the winning lottery table. Next, the information of the selected combination determination result number is stored in the above-described winning / RP combination determination result number storage area or the combination of character combination determination result number storage area.

  After performing the winning combination determination processing, it is determined which of the game modes 0 to 7 is set to the game mode (step S6). Then, according to the set game mode, a game mode 0 (lever) process (step S7), a game mode 1 (lever) process (step S8), a game mode 2 (lever) process (step S9), a game mode 3 (lever) processing (step S10), game mode 4 (lever) processing (step S11), game mode 5 (lever) processing (step S12), game mode 6 (lever) processing (step S13), game mode 7 ( Lever) Perform any one of the processes (step S14).

  In the game mode 0 (lever) process, as shown in FIG. 35A, first, it is determined whether any of the combination determination result numbers 15 to 22, 48 to 50 has been selected in the combination determination process. A determination is made (step S41). Here, if any combination determination result number has been selected, the above-mentioned AT lottery is performed (step S42), and it is determined whether or not the AT has been won (step S43). Here, if the AT has been won, "1" is added to the AT stock number (step S44). Specifically, a process of incrementing the value (initial value “0”) of the AT stock number counter set in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 63 by “+1” is performed. Then, the aforementioned precursor G number lottery is performed (step S45), and the process returns. On the other hand, if the combination determination result numbers 15 to 22 and 48 to 50 are not selected in the determination in step S41, the process returns to step S42 to S45 to be performed, and in the determination in step S43, the AT is determined. If no winning has been made, the process returns to step S44 and S45.

In the game mode 1 (lever) process, as shown in FIG. 35 (B), the process returns without performing any process. In the game mode 2 (lever) process, a push order instruction number setting process is performed as shown in FIG. 35 (C) (step S51). In this push order instruction number setting process, as shown in FIG. 35 (D), it is determined which combination determination result number (winning / RP combination determination result number) has been selected (step S52). If any one of the combination determination result numbers 2, 7, 12, 23, 29, 35, and 42 has been selected, the pressing order instruction number A1 is selected (step S53), and the combination determination result numbers 3, 8, and If any one of 24, 30, 36, and 43 has been selected, the pressing order instruction number A2 is selected (step S54), and any of the combination determination result numbers 4, 9, 13, 13, 25, 31, 37, and 44 are selected. If has been selected, a pressing order instruction number A3 is selected (step S55). Similarly, if any of the combination determination result numbers 5, 10, 26, 32, 38, and 45 has been selected, the pressing order instruction number A4 is selected (step S56), and the combination determination result numbers 6, 11, and 27 are selected. , 33, 39, or 46 is selected (step S57), and if any of the combination determination result numbers 28, 34, 40, and 47 is selected, A push order instruction number A6 is selected (step S58). Although not shown, information on the selected push order instruction number is stored in the above-described push order instruction number storage area (see FIG. 27E), and the process returns. When a combination determination result number other than those described above has been selected, the process returns without selecting any of the push order instruction numbers. This is the same as the case where the push order instruction number A0 is selected and the information is stored. The same applies (the information of the push order instruction number is cleared at the end of the game, but the cleared state is the same as the state of storing the information of the push order instruction number A0 (“00000000B”)).

  In the gaming mode 3 (lever) processing, first, as shown in FIG. 36A, the pressing order instruction number setting processing is performed (step S61). Next, it is determined whether or not any of the combination determination result numbers 23 to 28 has been selected (step S62). If it has been selected, the above-described pressing order game lottery is performed (step S63), and the pressing order is determined. It is determined whether or not the game lottery has been won (step S64). Here, in the case of winning, it is determined which of the combination determination result numbers 23 to 28 has been selected (step S65), and if the combination determination result number 23 or 24 has been selected. Selects the pressing order instruction number A7 (step S66), and selects the pressing order instruction number A8 if the combination determination result number 25 or 26 has been selected (step S67), and selects the combination determination result number 27 or 28. If so, a pressing order instruction number A9 is selected, and the process proceeds to step S69. On the other hand, if the combination determination result numbers 23 to 28 have not been selected in the determination in step S62, the process directly proceeds to step S69 from there, and if the determination in step S64 does not win the pressing order game lottery, Then, the process directly proceeds to step S69.

  Thus, in the game mode 3 (lever) process, if any of the combination determination result numbers 23 to 28 has been selected by the combination determination process, the normal pressing order instruction number (any one of A1 to A6) is set. In addition to the selection, when the player wins the pressing order game lottery, the pressing order instruction number (A7 to A9) for the pressing order game is also selected. As described above, the push order instruction number for the push order game is used to notify the push order in the push order game, and the normal push order instruction number is used to determine whether or not the push order game is correct. Used for

  In step S69, it is determined whether or not any of the combination determination result numbers 17 to 22 has been selected in the combination determination processing. Here, if any combination determination result number has been selected, the above-mentioned AT lottery is performed (step S70), and it is determined whether or not the AT has been won (step S71). Here, if the AT has been won, the AT stock number is incremented by "1" (step S72), and the process returns. On the other hand, if the combination determination result numbers 17 to 22 are not selected in the determination in step S69, the process returns without performing the processing in steps S70 to S72. If the AT is not determined in the determination in step S71, Then, the process returns without performing the process of step S72. Note that the combination determination result numbers 17 to 22, which are the trigger for executing the AT lottery, are selected only in the RT3 state. For this reason, the game mode is set to the game mode 3 but is not set to the RT3 (for example, if the player does not follow the pressing order navigation in the game mode 2, the game mode shifts to a game state other than the RT3 and the game mode 3 is set). No), the AT lottery is not performed, and the AT stock number is not added.

In the game mode 4 (lever) process, as shown in FIG. 36B, the process returns without performing any process. In the game mode 5 (lever) process, as shown in FIG. 36C, an AT lottery is performed (step S81), and it is determined whether or not the AT has been won (step S82). If the AT has been won, the AT stock number is incremented by "1" (step S83), and the process returns. On the other hand, if the AT has not been won, the process returns without performing the processing of step S83. In the above game mode 6 (lever) processing, as shown in FIG. 36 (D), the process returns without performing any processing. In the game mode 7 (lever) process, as shown in FIG. 36 (E), an AT lottery is performed (step S91), and it is determined whether or not the AT has been won (step S92). Here, if the AT has been won, the AT stock number is incremented by "1" (step S93), and the process returns. On the other hand, if the AT has not been won, the process returns without performing the processing of step S93. When the game modes 5 and 7 are set as described above, each game AT lottery is performed.

  With the return from the above-mentioned game mode 0 (lever) processing to game mode 7 (lever) processing, the process proceeds to step S15 in FIG. 33 to perform a push order instruction display processing. Specifically, the WIN lamp indicates the pressing order (see FIG. 16) corresponding to the pressing order instruction number (A1 to A9) selected in the game mode 2 (lever) process or the game mode 3 (lever) process. A process for displaying the data of the push order instruction number in the A register and a process of setting the data of the push order instruction number set in the A register to a predetermined output port are performed. If none of the push order instruction numbers A1 to A9 is selected, the push order is not notified by the WIN lamp 46j. Further, in the game modes other than the game modes 2 and 3, the pressing order instruction number is not selected, and the notification of the pressing order by the WIN lamp 46j is not performed.

  After performing the pressing order instruction display process, it is determined whether or not the slot machine 1 has the test specification (step S16). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the above-described under test flag is set to ON, and if it is set to ON, it is determined that the test specification is set. judge. In addition, as a method of determining whether or not the test specification is satisfied, various methods described later (for example, in the reel rotation start preparation processing shown in FIGS. (A method for determining whether or not to set). If it is determined in step S16 that the test specification is satisfied, an interrupt (for example, execution of a timer interrupt process described later) is prohibited (step S17), and a symbol stop test signal output process described below is performed (step S18). .

  This symbol stop test signal output processing is executed by the control program stored in the above-mentioned second PRG area (see FIG. 26). As shown in FIG. 37 (A), first, preparation processing is performed. (Step S1801). More specifically, the stack pointer is saved in the first PRG area, the stack pointer is set in the second PRG area, and the data stored in each register is saved. Next, the above-described stop reception designation table T2 (see FIG. 30B) is set (step S1802). Specifically, the start address ("** 30H") of the stop reception designation table T2 is set in the HL register. Then, it is determined whether or not the BB operation is being performed (step S1803). Specifically, the data of the operation state flag stored in the operation state flag storage area (see FIG. 27A) is set in the A register, and the value set in the A register is shifted right by one bit. I do. For example, during the BB and RB operations, the A register value becomes "00011000B" at first, and becomes "00001100B" after right shift (in this case, the zero flag = "0"). Further, it is determined whether or not the cello flag is "1". If "1", it is determined that the BB operation is not being performed, and if "0", it is determined that the BB operation is being performed. Note that right shift is not performed, and it is determined whether or not the value of bit 3 of the A register value is “1”. If “1”, it is determined that the BB operation is being performed. It may be determined that it is not during the BB operation.

If it is determined in step S1803 that the BB operation is not being performed, the process advances to step S1804 to set the above-described stop reception designation table T1 (see FIG. 30A). Specifically, the start address (“** 00H”) of the stop reception specification table T1 is set in the HL register (if it is determined that the BB operation is not being performed, the stop reception specification table T2 remains set. ). Then, the designated table address corresponding to the previously selected pressing order instruction number is set (step S1805). More specifically, the numerical value of the push order instruction number (for example, “3” for A3, “6” for A6), and when the stop reception designation table T2 is set (during BB operation), the push order instruction is always given. Since the number is A0, the data of "0" is set in the A register, the value set in the A register is added to the A register, and the value of the A register after addition is added to the A register again. This is equivalent to quadrupling the value initially set in the A register. Further, the value of the A register is added to the value of the HL register. That is, a new address corresponding to the push order instruction number is set in the HL register by adding a value obtained by quadrupling the value of the push order instruction number to the start address of the stop reception designation table T1 or T2.

  Next, the flow advances to step S1806 to set a pressing order designation command output request. Specifically, a higher value ("71H") of a predetermined value ("7100H") for identifying the data of the push order instruction number is set in the D register, and the HL register is further set. The value stored at the address indicated (matched) by adding "0" to the value stored in the register is set in the E register (the process of adding "0" to the value of the HL register is And the value of the HL register has not been updated). Next, the process proceeds to step S1807 to output a symbol stop test signal.

  In this symbol stop test signal output, first, as shown in FIG. 37B, the address data is saved (step S1821). Specifically, the data at the address stored in the HL register is saved in the stack area. Next, the address of the data register of the serial communication test output port (the test output port SO0) is set (step S1822). Specifically, the address (referred to as “FE53H”) of the data register of the test output port SO0 is set in the HL register. Next, the first command is written (step S1823). Specifically, the value of the D register is set to the address indicated by the value of the HL register. Subsequently, the second command is written (step S1824). Specifically, the value of the E register (the above "71H") is set to the address indicated by the value of the HL register. Next, a SUM command is calculated (step S1825). Specifically, the value of the D register is set in the A register, the value of the E register is added to the value of the A register, and “2” is added to the value of the A register. Then, OR the value of the A register and “10000000B”.

  Next, a SUM command is written (step S1826). Specifically, the A register value is set to the address indicated by the value of the HL register (the data register of the test output port SO0). Then, the address data is restored (step S1827), and the process returns. The return of the address data is, specifically, a process of setting the data of the address saved in the stack area in the HL register. The following effects can be obtained by using the SUM command as follows. That is, since the test signal is output to the test device via the relay device as outlined above, the relay device is configured to determine whether the first and second commands are correct or not based on the SUM command. When it is determined that the command is correct, the first and second commands are output to the test apparatus, and when it is determined that the command is incorrect, the first command and the second command are not output. As a result, it is possible to prevent the design stop test signal carrying incorrect information from being output to the test apparatus. The relay device determines whether the command is the first or second command or the SUM command by the data value of bit 7 (“0” for the first and second commands, and “1” for the SUM command). ) Can be determined.

After executing the symbol stop test signal output, the process advances to step S1809 to set a left reel stop reception position designation command output request. Specifically, the value of the D register is incremented by "1". That is, the value of the D register changes from "71H" to "72H". The value “72H” is a value higher than the value (“7200H”) set to identify the data at the left reel stop acceptance position. Further, the value stored at the address indicated by the value obtained by adding “1” to the value of the HL register is set in the E register (instead of performing the processing of adding “1” to the value of the HL register, Has not been updated). Next, the process proceeds to step S1810, and the above-described symbol stop test signal is output.

  After the execution of the symbol stop test signal output, the flow advances to step S1811 to set a middle reel stop reception position designation command output request. Specifically, the value of the D register is incremented by "1". That is, the value of the D register changes from "72H" to "73H". The value “73H” is a value higher than the value (“7300H”) set to identify the data of the middle reel stop reception position. Further, the value stored at the address indicated by the value obtained by adding “2” to the value of the HL register is set in the E register (instead of performing the process of adding “2” to the value of the HL register, Has not been updated). Next, the process proceeds to step S1812, and the above-described symbol stop test signal is output.

  After the execution of the symbol stop test signal output, the flow advances to step S1813 to set a right reel stop reception position designation command output request. Specifically, the value of the D register is incremented by "1". That is, the value of the D register changes from "73H" to "74H". The value “74H” is a value higher than the value (“7400H”) set to identify the data at the right reel stop reception position. Further, the value stored at the address indicated by the value obtained by adding “3” to the value of the HL register is set in the E register (instead of performing the process of adding “3” to the value of the HL register, Has not been updated). Next, the process proceeds to step S1814, and the above-described symbol stop test signal is output.

  After the symbol stop test signal is output, an end process (step S1815) is performed, and the process returns. In this end processing, the data stored in each register and the stack pointer in the first PRG area, which are saved in the preparation processing in step S1801, are restored. As described above, in the present embodiment, the symbol stop test signal output process is performed after the process of selecting the push order instruction number and displaying the same (the push order instruction display process) is performed. By doing so, the process of storing the information of the selected push order instruction number in the push order instruction number storage area and the process of reading out and displaying the information of the push order instruction number stored therein can be performed continuously. Since it becomes possible, the flow of processing becomes smooth. On the other hand, it is conceivable to perform a symbol stop test signal output process after selecting the push order instruction number, and then perform a symbol stop test signal output process. Is stored in the pressing order instruction number storage area, and the processing of reading and displaying the information of the pressing order instruction number stored therein is performed with the symbol stop test signal output processing interposed therebetween. It becomes complicated or the display starts slowly.

  With the return from the above-described symbol stop test signal output process, the process proceeds to step S19 in FIG. 33, the interruption is permitted, and the process proceeds to step S20. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S16 that the specification is not the test specification, the process directly proceeds to step S20. In this step S20, the data of the pressing order instruction number is stored in the transmission buffer (the above-mentioned CB) to the sub-control means (sub). By storing the data in the transmission buffer, the data of the pressing order instruction number is transmitted to the sub.

  Next, a mask process is performed on the winning order / RP pressing order instruction number (step S21), and the data of the effect group number (see FIG. 19) determined by the mask process is stored in the transmission buffer (step S22). By storing the data in the transmission buffer, the data of the effect group number is transmitted to the sub. Further, the data of the pressing order instruction number of the accessory is stored in the transmission buffer (step S23). By storing the data in the transmission buffer, the data of the pressing order instruction number of the accessory is transmitted to the sub.

Next, a reel rotation start preparation process is performed (step S24). In this reel rotation start preparation process, as shown in FIG. 38A, it is determined whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed (step S101). Specifically, the value of the minimum game time timer described below is set. Read, determine whether or not it is "0". If "0", determine that the minimum game time has elapsed and proceed to the next step. If not "0", the minimum game time has elapsed. It is determined that they have not been performed, and processing for repeating this determination is performed. As described above, the minimum game time is a time that must be secured at least from the start of rotation of all reels in one game to the start of rotation of all reels in the next game (for example, 4.1 seconds). Next, a new minimum game time is set (step S102). Specifically, a value of “1836” (1836 × 2.235 ms / 4100 ms) is set in the minimum game time timer set in a predetermined storage area of the RAM. The set timer value is decremented by "1" each time a timer interrupt process described later is executed, and is kept "0" after it becomes "0".

  Next, it is determined whether or not the test-in-progress flag is ON (step S103). If the test-in-progress flag is ON, the process proceeds to step S103, where the above-described winning information output period timer is set (set value “25”), and the process returns. The set timer value is decremented by "1" each time a timer interrupt process described later is executed, and is kept "0" after the timer value becomes "0". On the other hand, if the test-in-progress flag is not ON, the routine returns without setting the winning information output period timer. As described above, in the reel rotation start preparation processing according to the present embodiment, when it is determined that the test is not the test specification (it is the mass production specification) when the power is turned on and the test-in-progress flag is set to OFF, the winning information output period timer is set. It will not be done. As described later, if the winning information output period timer is not set, a test signal carrying actual winning information is not output, so that it is possible to prevent the winning information from being illegally acquired from the test signal. .

  As a modification (for example, an example corresponding to a modification J1 of the above-described test specification determination preparation processing (see FIG. 32B)), a reel rotation start preparation processing (a modification K1) shown in FIG. ) May be performed. In this reel rotation start preparation process (Modification K1), after a new minimum game time is set (Step S102A) by checking the elapse of the minimum game time (Step S101A), the input port is read (specifically, the terminal PI0). ＰＩPI7) (step S1021A), and determines whether or not the potential of the terminal PI0 is at the test level (step S1022A). Here, if the potential of the terminal PI0 is at the test level, the winning information output period timer is set (step S104A) and the process returns. If not, the winning information output period timer is not set. Return to In the case of the modification K1, whether or not the test specification is satisfied is determined for each game in the reel rotation start preparation processing. If it is determined that the game does not conform to the test specifications in one game, the winning information output period timer is not set, and a test signal carrying actual winning information is not output. Is determined to be a test level), a winning information output period timer is set, and a test signal carrying actual winning information is output. For this reason, there is an advantage that it is not necessary to perform a process for determining whether or not the test specification is satisfied when the power is turned on, and the control process at the time of turning on the power can be simplified. If the wrongdoing is performed, there is a possibility that the winning information may be illegally obtained from the test signal.

As another modified example (for example, an example corresponding to the modified example J2 of the test specification determination preparing process described above (see FIG. 32C)), a reel rotation start preparing process (modified example K2) shown in FIG. ) May be performed. In this reel rotation start preparation process (Modification K2), a new minimum game time is set (Step S102B) by checking the elapse of the minimum game time (Step S101B), and then reading of each potential level of the terminals PI0 to PI7 is performed. It performs (step S1021B), and determines whether or not the potential of the current (currently acquired) terminal PI0 is at the test level (step S1023B). Here, when the potential of the current terminal PI0 is at the test level, the potential of the terminal PI0 stored when the power is turned on is also at the test level (the current terminal PI0).
It is determined whether the potential of 0 and the potential of PI0 at the time of power-on match at the test level (step S1024B). If the potential of the terminal PI0 stored at power-on is also at the test level, the winning information output period timer is set (step S104B) and the routine returns. On the other hand, if the potential of the current terminal PI0 is not at the test level, or if the potential of PI0 when the power is turned on is not at the test level, the process returns without setting the winning information output period timer. In the case of the modified example K2, if the potential of PI0 at the time of power-on is not at the test level, the winning information output period timer is not set even if the potential of PI0 is at the test level thereafter. Therefore, even if a fraudulent act of artificially setting PI0 to the test level is performed, it is possible to prevent the winning information from being illegally acquired from the test signal.

  As another modification (for example, another modification corresponding to the modification J2 of the test specification determination preparation processing), a reel rotation start preparation processing (modification K3) shown in FIG. 38D may be performed. . In the reel rotation start preparation process (Modification K3), after the minimum game time has elapsed (Step S101C), a new minimum game time is set (Step S102C), and then the reading of each potential level of the terminals PI0 to PI7 is performed. It performs (step S1021C), and determines whether or not the current (currently obtained) potential of the terminal PI0 is at the test level (step S1023C). Here, when the potential of the current terminal PI0 is at the test level, the potential of the terminal PI0 stored at power-on is also at the test level (the potential of the current terminal PI0 and the potential of PI0 at power-on are both lower). It is determined whether or not both match at the test level) (step S1024C). If the potential of the terminal PI0 stored at the time of turning on the power is also at the test level, the winning information output period timer is set (step S104C) and the routine returns. On the other hand, if the potential of the terminal PI0 at this time is at the test level, but the potential of PI0 at power-on is not at the test level, the potential of the terminal PI0 stored at power-on is changed to the test level ( Step S1025C) Return.

  Then, in the rule rotation start preparation processing (change example K3) in the next game, when the potential of the current terminal PI0 is at the test level and the changed potential of PI0 at power-on is also at the test level. , The winning information output period timer is set. As described above, in the case of the modification K3, even if the potential of PI0 at the time of power-on is not at the test level, if the potential of PI0 is at the test level thereafter, the potential of PI0 at the time of power-on is also at the time of test. There is a possibility that the winning information output period timer will be set in the game after being rewritten to the level. Therefore, even if the potential of PI0 at the time of power-on is erroneously stored due to the influence of noise or the like, it is possible to correct the potential and output a test signal carrying actual winning information. In the mass-production specification, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act of setting PI0 to the test level may be performed artificially. However, when the potential of the current terminal PI0 does not match the potential of PI0 at the time of power-on, By setting to perform error notification, it is possible to draw attention to a game clerk or the like, and then monitor whether or not fraudulent acts are performed, so that the winning information can be illegally acquired from a test signal. Can be prevented.

As another modified example (for example, another example corresponding to modified example J2 of the test specification determination preparing process), a reel rotation start preparing process (modified example K4) shown in FIG. 39A is performed. Is also good. In this reel rotation start preparation process (Modification K4), after the minimum game time has elapsed (Step S101D), a new minimum game time is set (Step S102D), and the reading of each potential level of the terminals PI0 to PI7 is performed. This is performed (step S1021D), and it is determined whether or not the current (currently acquired) potential level of the terminal PI0 matches the potential level of the terminal PI0 stored when the power is turned on (step S1026D). Here, if they match, it is determined whether or not the current potential of the terminal PI0 is at the test level (step S1027D). If the current potential of the terminal PI0 is at the test level, the winning information output period timer is set (step S104D), and if not, the winning information output period timer is not set. To return. On the other hand, in step S1026D, when the potential level of the terminal PI0 at this time does not match the potential level of the terminal PI0 at the time of power-on, the potential of the terminal PI0 stored at the time of power-on is changed to the level at the time of mass production (step S1026D). S1028D) Return.

  As described above, in the case of the modification K4, when the potential level of the terminal PI0 at this time does not match the potential level of the terminal PI0 at the time of power-on, the potential of the terminal PI0 stored at the time of power-on is changed to the level at the time of mass production. . Then, even if the potential level of the terminal PI0 read in the reel rotation start preparation process (Modification K4) in the subsequent game is the test level, the potential level of the terminal PI0 when the power is turned on (mass production level). Therefore, the winning information output period timer is not set. If the potential level of the terminal PI0 acquired after the next game is the level at the time of mass production, it will match the potential level of the terminal PI0 when the power is turned on. Therefore, the winning information output period timer is never set. That is, if the potential level of the terminal PI0 when the power is turned on does not match the newly acquired potential level of the terminal PI0 even once, the winning information output period timer is not set thereafter, and the test signal It is possible to prevent the winning information from being illegally obtained from the company.

  As another modified example (for example, an example corresponding to modified examples L1 and L2 of output processing of test signals and the like described later), a reel rotation start preparation processing (modified example K5) illustrated in FIG. 39B may be performed. Good. In the reel rotation start preparation process (Modification K5), after the minimum game time has elapsed (Step S101E), a new minimum game time is set (Step S102E), and then the winning information output period timer is set (Step S104E). And return. As described above, in the case of the modified example K5, in the reel rotation start preparation processing, the processing for determining whether or not the test specification is performed is not performed (performed in a timer interrupt processing described later).

  Further, as another modified example (for example, another example corresponding to modified examples L1 and L2 of the later-described test signal etc. output processing), a reel rotation start preparation processing (modified example K6) illustrated in FIG. 39C is performed. It may be. In the reel rotation start preparation process (Modification K6), a new minimum game time is set (Step S102F) by confirming the elapse of the minimum game time (Step S101F), and the process proceeds to Step S1031F to be selected by the combination determination process. Acquires the information of the winning combination determination result number. More specifically, the data value stored in the above-mentioned bonus character determination result number storage area (see FIG. 27D) is set in the H register, and the above-described winning / RP combination determination result is stored in the L register. A process for setting the data value stored in the number storage area (see FIG. 27C) is performed. Next, the data of the identifier is set (step S1032F). Specifically, a process of setting bit 7 of the H register to “1” and setting bit 6 of the L register to “1” is performed. Next, the combination determination result information is stored (step S1033F). More specifically, the H register value is stored in the above-described winning item winning information storage area (see FIG. 29B), and the L register value is stored in the above winning / RP winning information storage area (see FIG. 29A ) Is performed. Then, the winning information output period timer is set (step S104F), and the process returns. As described above, in the case of the modification K6 as well, in the reel rotation start preparation processing, processing for determining whether or not the test specification is performed is not performed (performed in timer interrupt processing described later).

  With the return from the reel rotation start preparation processing, the process proceeds to step S25 in FIG. 33, where the reel stop management processing is performed. In this reel stop management processing, the rotation state from the start of rotation of each reel to the constant speed state is managed. In accordance therewith, a stoppable position is determined, and processing for managing the rotation state from deceleration to stoppage of the reel is performed.

Next, a display determination process for confirming a stop display symbol on each reel is performed (step S2).
6) Further, a payout process is performed (step S27). In the payout process, the game medals are paid out when the symbol combination stopped and displayed is a symbol corresponding to a winning combination (small hand) to be paid out. The payout of the game medals is performed by a process of adding the game medals to the number of stored medals when the medals can be stored, and the payout of the game medals is actually paid out from the hopper when the stored number reaches the upper limit.

  Next, a game end check process is performed (step S28). In this game end check processing, as shown in FIG. 40, first, the data of the combination determination result number is cleared (step S111). Specifically, the data of the winning / RP combination determination result number (winning / RP combination determination result number flag) stored in the above-described winning / RP combination determination result number storage area (see FIG. 27C). Is performed. In the game in which the BB operation symbol is stopped and displayed, the data of the role determination result number of the role stored in the above-described role combination result number storage area (see FIG. 27 (D)). A process of clearing the combination determination result number flag) is also performed. Subsequently, the re-game operation state flag is cleared (step S112). Specifically, a process of setting bit 0 of the operation state flag storage area (see FIG. 27A) to “0” (clearing the replay operation state flag) is performed.

Next, BB operation management processing is performed (step S113). In the BB operation management process, as shown in FIG. 41A, first, an operation state flag is checked (step S131). Specifically, a process of setting the data value stored in the operation state flag storage area in the A register is performed. Further, a process of right-shifting the A register value by one bit is performed. For example, during BB and RB operations, the A register value when set = “00011000B”, and the A register value after right shift = “00001100B”. At this time, the cello flag =
It becomes "0". Next, it is determined whether or not the BB operation is being performed (step S114). Specifically, it is determined whether the zero flag is “0” or “1”. If “0”, it is determined that the BB is operating, and if “1”, it is determined that the BB is not operating. It should be noted that the right shift is not performed, and it may be determined whether bit 3 of the A register value when set is “1” (BB in operation) or “0” (BB not in operation). Good.

Here, when it is determined that the BB is in operation, data of the medal obtainable number (remaining number) during the BB is obtained (step S133). Specifically, a process of setting data of the number of obtainable game medals (remaining number) stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM in the A register is performed. Next, it is determined whether the BB operation has ended (step S134). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value set in the A register is “0” (= the number of medals paid out during BB exceeds “450”) (or whether or not the zero flag is “1”). If the value is "0", it is determined that the BB operation has ended, and if the value is not "0", the BB operation is continued. Here, when it is determined that the BB operation has ended, the BB operation state flag and the RB operation state flag are cleared (step S134). Specifically, a process of storing the A register value (in this case, “00000000B”) in the operation state flag storage area is performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S132 that the BB operation is not performed, the process returns without performing the processes in steps S133 to S135. If it is determined in step S134 that the BB operation is continued, the process in step S135 is not performed. Return to

  With the return from the BB operation management process, the process proceeds to step S114 in FIG. 40, and it is determined whether the RB operation is being performed. Specifically, it is determined whether bit 4 of the data value stored in the operation state flag storage area is “1” or “0”, and if “1”, “0” during RB operation If so, a process of determining that the RB is not operating is performed. Here, when it is determined that the RB operation is being performed, an RB operation management process is performed (step S115).

In the RB operation management process, as shown in FIG. 41B, first, the number of possible games in the RB is decremented by "1" (step S141). Specifically, a process of updating the value of the above-mentioned RB game possible number counter by subtracting “1” is performed. Next, it is determined whether the number of possible games in the RB is “0” (step S142). Specifically, a process of determining whether or not the updated value of the RB game possible number counter is “0” (or whether or not the zero flag is “1” as a result of the calculation for updating the counter value). I do. Here, if the possible number of games during the RB is not “0”, it is determined whether or not the payout number of the game medals in the current game is “0” (= whether or not the small win is not established) (step). S143). Here, when the medal payout number is not “0” (= when the small win is established), the possible winning number in the RB is decremented by “1” (step S144). More specifically, a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the RB prize possible number counter and updating the value is performed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the RB operation has been completed (step S145). More specifically, it is determined whether or not the updated value of the RB winning possible number counter is “0”. Perform processing. Here, if it is determined that the RB operation has ended, or if it is determined in step S142 that the number of playable games during RB is “0”, the RB operation state flag is cleared (step S146). Specifically, a process of updating bit 4 of the operation state flag storage area to “0” is performed. Next, the standby time at the end of the RB operation is set (step S147). Specifically, a process of setting “0” = “00000000B” in the B register and “5” = “00000101B” in the C register is performed. Next, a standby time waiting process described below is performed (step S148), and the process returns. If it is determined in step S143 that the medal payout number is “0”, the process returns without performing the processes in steps S144 to S148. If it is determined in step S145 that the RB operation is to be continued, The process returns without performing the processing of steps S146 to S148.

  In the waiting time waiting process, as shown in FIG. 41C, first, it is determined whether or not the waiting time has elapsed (step S151). Specifically, the value of the BC register is determined. If the B register value is “0” and the C register value is “0”, it is determined that the standby time has elapsed. Otherwise, the standby time has elapsed. It is determined that it has not been performed. Here, if the waiting time has not elapsed, an interruption waiting process is performed (step S152). In this interrupt waiting process, as shown in FIG. 41D, an interrupt counter value is obtained (step S161). Specifically, of the 16-bit counter value in the interrupt counter set in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 63 (here, two address areas of “F02BH” and “F02CH”), A process of setting the data of the counter value (the value stored in “F02CH”) to the A register is performed. Then, it waits in that state until the interrupt counter value changes (the interrupt counter value is updated in step MT13 of the timer interrupt process described later) (step S162). Specifically, an arithmetic process of subtracting the counter value stored in “F02C” from the A register value is executed, and if the arithmetic result is “0” (zero flag = “1”), the interrupt counter value changes. It is determined that there is no operation, and if the operation result is not “0” (if the zero flag = “0”), it is determined that the interrupt counter value has changed. After the execution of the interrupt wait process, the wait time is updated (the value of the C register is decremented by "1") (step S153), and the process returns to step S151.

With the return from the RB operation management process, the process proceeds to step S116 in FIG. 40, and the RT transition process is performed. In this RT transition processing, as shown in FIG. 42, it is determined whether or not the setting is non-RT (step S171), and if not, it is determined whether or not the setting is RT1. (Step S172). Here, if it is set to RT1, it is determined whether or not the replaying combination 5 (RP2 transition RP) is established (step S173), and if it is established, it is set to RT2 (step S174). To return. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S172 that RT1 has not been set, it is determined whether RT2 has been set (step S175). Here, if it is set to RT2, it is determined whether or not the replaying combination 6 (RT3 transition RP) is established (step S176), and if it is established, it is set to RT3 (step S177), To return. Also, in the above determination of step S176, when the re-gaming combination 6 has not been established, it is determined whether or not the re-gaming combination 3 or 4 (RT1 shift RP) has been established (step S178). In this case, RT1 is set (step S179), and the process returns.

  Furthermore, if it is determined in step S175 that RT2 has not been set, it is determined whether RT3 has been set (step S180). Here, if it is set to RT3, it is determined whether or not the replay combination 3 or 4 (RT1 transition RP) is established (step S178), and if it is established, it is set to RT1 (step S179). ), Return. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S180 that RT3 has not been set, it is determined whether RT4 has been set (step S181). Here, if it is set to RT4, it is determined whether or not the BB combination has been established (step S182). If it has been established, it is set to RT5 (step S183), and the process returns. If it has, the routine returns with the setting of RT4 maintained. If it is determined in step S181 that RT4 is not set (in this case, RT5 is set), it is determined whether or not the number of game medals paid out during BB exceeds “450” ( In step S184), if it exceeds, set to non-RT (step S185) and return.

  If the non-RT is set in the determination in step S171, or if the replaying game 3 or 4 is not established in the determination in step S178, it is determined whether or not the specific symbol is stopped and displayed. Then (step S186), if the stop display has been made, RT1 is set and the routine returns. On the other hand, if the specific symbol has not been stopped and displayed, or if the re-gaming combination 5 has not been established in the determination in step S173, it is determined whether or not the BB combination has been won in the game (determining the role of the combination) It is determined whether the result number 1 has been selected (step S188). Here, if the BB combination has been won, it is determined whether or not the BB combination has been established (step S189). If it has not been established, RT4 is set (step S190), and the process returns. If it has been set, RT5 is set (step S191) and the routine returns. If the BB combination has not been won, the process returns with maintaining the RT state setting.

  With the return from the RT transition process, the process proceeds to step S117 in FIG. 40, and it is determined which game mode among the game modes 0 to 7 is set. Then, according to the set game mode, the game mode 0 (all stop) processing (step S118), the game mode 1 (all stop) processing (step S119), the game mode 2 (all stop) processing (step S120) Game mode 3 (all stop) processing (step S121), game mode 4 (all stop) processing (step S122), game mode 5 (all stop) processing (step S123), game mode 6 (all stop) processing (step S121) S124), one of the game mode 7 (all stop) processing (step S125) is performed.

In the game mode 0 (all stop) process, first, as shown in FIG. 43A, it is determined whether or not the BB combination has been won in the game (step S201). Here, if the BB combination has been won, it is determined whether or not the BB combination has been established (step S202). If the BB combination has been established, the game mode is set to 5 (step S203) and the process returns. If not, the game mode is set to game mode 4 (step S204) and the routine returns. On the other hand, if the BB combination has not been won, it is determined whether or not the AT stock number is greater than “0” (step S205). Here, if the AT stock number is larger than "0", the AT stock number is subtracted by "1" (step S206), and the precursor counter (the precursor G selected in the AT precursor G number lottery).
The number of precursors G selected in the AT precursor G number lottery is set in a counter (set in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 63 for managing the number) (step S207), and the game mode 1 is set (step S208). ) Return. On the other hand, if the AT stock number is “0” in the determination in step S205, the process returns to performing the processes in steps S206 to S208.

  In the game mode 1 (all stop) process, as shown in FIG. 43B, first, it is determined whether or not the BB combination has been won in the game (step S211). Here, if the BB combination has been won, it is determined whether or not the BB combination has been established (step S212). If the BB combination has been established, the game mode is set to 7 (step S213). Is added (step S214), and if not, the game mode 6 is set (step S215) and the process returns. On the other hand, if the BB combination has not been won, the value of the precursor counter is subtracted by "1" (step S216), and it is determined whether or not the value of the precursor counter is "0" (step S217). If the value of the precursor counter is "0", the game mode is set to the game mode 2 (step S218), and the process returns. If the value of the precursor counter is not "0", the setting of the game mode 1 is maintained. And return.

  In the game mode 2 (all stop) process, as shown in FIG. 43C, first, it is determined whether or not the BB combination has been won in the game (step S221). Here, if the BB combination has been won, it is determined whether or not the BB combination has been established (step S222). If the BB combination has been established, the game mode is set to 7 (step S223). Is incremented by 1 (step S224), and if not, the game mode 6 is set (step S225), and the process returns. On the other hand, if the BB combination has not been won, it is determined whether or not RT3 has been set (step S226). Here, if it is set to RT3, the game mode 3 is set (step S228), the value of the AT counter is set to "50" (step S229), and the process returns. If it is not set to RT3, It is determined whether or not the pressing order by the player matches the pressing order of the notified pressing order instruction number (step S227). If they do not match, the game mode is set to the game mode 3 (step S228), the value of the AT counter is set to "50" (step S229), and the process returns. The routine returns without changing the setting and without setting the AT counter.

In the game mode 3 (all stop) process, first, as shown in FIG. 44A, it is determined whether or not the BB combination has been won in the game (step S231). Here, if the BB combination has been won, it is determined whether or not the BB combination has been established (step S232). If the BB combination has been established, the game mode is set to 7 (step S223). Is added (step S234), and if not established, the game mode 6 is set (step S235) and the process returns. On the other hand, if the BB combination has not been won, it is determined whether or not the game has been won in the pressing order game lottery (step S236). Here, if the player has won, the pressing order by the player is not the selected pressing order instruction number (the pressing order instruction number for the pressing order application game (A7 to A9), but the normal stored for the determination. (A1 to A6) is determined (step S237), and if they match, the AT stock number is incremented by "1" (step S238). The process proceeds to S239, and if they do not match, the process directly proceeds to Step S239. In this step S239, the value of the AT counter is decremented by "1". Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the AT counter is "0" (step S240). If the value of the AT counter is "0", it is determined whether or not the AT stock number is greater than "0". (Step S241). Here, if the AT stock number is larger than "0", the AT stock number is subtracted by "1" (step S242), the precursor counter is set to "1" (step S243), and the game mode 1 is set. (Step S244) Return. On the other hand, in the determination in step S241, the AT stock number is “0”.
In the case of "", the processing in steps S242 to S244 is not performed, the game mode is set to 0 (step S245), and the process returns. If the value of the AT counter is not "0" in the determination in step S240, The processing in steps S241 to S245 is not performed, and the process returns with the setting of the game mode 3 maintained.

  In the game mode 4 (all stop) process, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), first, it is determined whether or not the BB combination has been established in the game (step S251). 5 (step S252) and returns. If the condition is not satisfied, the processing in steps S251 and S252 is not performed, and the game mode 4 is maintained and the process returns.

  In the game mode 5 (all stop) process, as shown in FIG. 44 (C), first, it is determined whether or not the number of game medals paid out during BB has exceeded “450” (step S261). In this case, it is determined whether the AT stock number is larger than “0” (step S262). Here, if the AT stock number is larger than "0", the AT stock number is subtracted by "1" (step S263), the game mode 2 is set (step S264), and the process returns. The AT stock number is "0". In the case of, the processing in steps S263 and S264 is not performed, the game mode is set to 0 (step S265), and the process returns. If the number of game medals to be paid out does not exceed "450" in the determination in step S261, the processing in steps S262 to S265 is not performed, and the game mode 5 setting is maintained and the routine returns.

  In the game mode 6 (all stop) process, as shown in FIG. 45 (A), first, it is determined whether or not the BB combination has been established in the game (step S271). 7 (step S272), further adds "1" to the AT stock number (step S273), and returns. If the AT stock number is not satisfied, the processing in steps S271 to S273 is not performed, and the game mode 6 is set. To return.

  In the game mode 7 (all stop) process, as shown in FIG. 45 (B), first, it is determined whether or not the number of game medals paid out during BB has exceeded “450” (step S281). In this case, the AT stock number is subtracted by "1" (step S282), the game mode is set to the game mode 2 (step S283), and if not, the processing of the above steps S282 and S283 is not performed, and the game mode 7 is not executed. Return with the setting of.

  In the return from the above-mentioned game mode 0 (all stop) processing to the game mode 7 (all stop) processing, the game end check processing shown in FIG. 40 also ends and returns. With the return from the game end check process, the process returns to step S1 in FIG. 33, and the game progress control process is repeated.

<Timer interrupt processing>
In this embodiment, processing such as reading of each game operation signal output in response to a game operation such as a bet operation performed by a player, detection (confirmation) of a signal level, transmission of each control command, drive control of a reel, and the like. Is performed by a timer interrupt process that is performed every predetermined time (for example, 2.235 milliseconds). In this timer interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 46A, first, an interrupt initial process (save of registers, prohibition of interrupt, etc.) is performed (step MT11). Is determined (step MT12). Here, if the power-off is detected, the power-off process is performed (step MT24). In the power-off processing, saving of registers, saving of a stack pointer, saving of an interrupt state, and the like are performed. In addition, processing such as holding of information relating to the winning combination determination information and RT state stored in a predetermined storage area, and calculation and storage of a checksum are also performed.

On the other hand, if the power interruption is not detected, a process of updating the interrupt counter value (subtracting "1") is performed (step MT13), and further, a timer measurement is performed (step MT14). This timer measurement is for performing processing such as subtraction or addition of a timer value of an arbitrary timer (such as the minimum game time timer or the winning information output period timer described above) set in the above-described game progress control processing. Next, the input port is read (step MT15). In the reading of the input port, reading and storing of the signal level of each game operation signal or the like input to the input port, determination of the signal level, and the like are performed.

  Next, a reel drive control process for controlling the drive of the reels 3a to 3c (rotation acceleration, deceleration, constant speed maintenance, stop maintenance, and the like) is performed (step MT16). In this reel drive control processing, a reel drive pulse output indicating the timing of switching the output phase (excitation phase) of the stepping motor according to the reel drive state (stop, reel rotation standby, acceleration, constant speed, deceleration, etc.) Processing such as update of the counter value, acquisition, update, and output of reel drive pulse data for driving the stepping motor is performed. In the next step MT17, it is determined whether or not the reel drive control process has been executed for all the reels. If not, the process returns to step MT16 to perform the reel drive control process again. On the other hand, when executed on all reels, a port output process for exciting the reels, hoppers, blockers, and the like is performed (step MT18), and further, a control command for transmitting a control command stored in a command buffer (CB). A transmission process is performed (step MT19).

Next, the process proceeds to step MT20 to read out the outer end signal (external signal) data stored in the predetermined storage area and output the outer end signal. Next, a test signal or the like output process described below is executed (step MT21), and after that, a process of updating random numbers used for a lottery or the like is executed (step MT22). Permission etc.) (step MT23), and return to the interrupt. As a modification example (an example corresponding to the modification examples K5 and K6 of the above-described reel rotation start preparation processing (see FIGS. 39B and 39C)), as shown in FIG. After the processing of the outer end signal output in step MT20, it is determined whether or not the slot machine 1 has the test specification (step MT201). The processing may not be executed (the test signal is not output). The determination as to whether or not the test specification is made can be made based on the ON / OFF state of the under test flag, but other various methods described above can be adopted.

  In the test signal etc. output processing, as shown in FIG. 47, the output data of the operation state test signal is set (step MT31). Specifically, a process of setting the data of the operation state flag stored in the operation state flag storage area (see FIG. 27A) to the A register is performed. Next, an operation state test signal is output (step MT32). Specifically, a process of outputting (setting) the data of the operation state flag set in the A register to the test output port PO8 is performed. As a result, the operation state test signal carrying the operation state flag information is output (transmitted) from the test output port PO8 to the test apparatus. As a modified example, there is no address area such as an operation state flag storage area for collectively storing data of each operation state flag (replay operation state flag, BB operation state flag, and RB operation state flag). The data of each operation state flag is stored in a separate address area, and the data is combined into one operation state flag data by an arithmetic processing using a register and output from the test output port PO8. Is also good.

Next, the value of the winning information output period timer is obtained (step MT33). Specifically, a process of setting the timer value data of the winning information output period timer stored in the winning information output period timer storage area (see FIG. 27F) to the A register is performed. Since the timer value of the winning information output period timer is decremented by "1" in step MT14 described above, in the process of step MT33 in the first timer interrupt process after the timer value is set to "25", , The timer value is “24”. Next, it is determined whether or not it is the output timing of the winning information (step MT34). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the timer value set in the A register is “0” (zero flag = “1”). If “0”, it is determined that it is not the output timing of the winning information, If it is not "0", it is determined that it is the output timing of the winning information.

  Here, when it is determined that it is the output timing of the winning information, it is determined whether or not it is the output timing of the accessory winning information (step MT35). Specifically, an operation of subtracting “12.5” from the timer value set in the A register in step MT33 is performed, and when the operation result is larger than “0” (when the timer value of the winning information output period timer is “24 to 13 "(the carry flag is set to a specific bit of the F register and" 1 "data is stored when the result of the operation is carried up or down) by" 0 ". Is determined) to be the timing of outputting the bonus information, and when the calculation result is smaller than "0" (when the timer value of the winning information output period timer is "12 to 1" (when the carry flag is "1"). ) Is determined not to be the output timing of the bonus winning information.

  Here, if it is determined that it is the output timing of the bonus winning information, the address of the bonus combination determination result number storage area (see FIG. 27D) is set (step MT36). Specifically, the upper value “F0H” of the address value “F049H” of the accessory combination determination result number storage area is set in the H register, and the lower value “49H” of the address value “F049H” is set in the L register. Perform the following processing. Next, the output data of the winning combination information is set (step MT37). Specifically, a process of setting the data of the role determination result number of the bonus stored in the bonus combination determination result number storage area in the A register is performed. Further, the data of the identifier of the accessory is set (step MT38). Specifically, a process for setting bit 6 of the A register to “0” and bit 7 to “1” is performed. Then, a winning information test signal is output (step MT42). Specifically, a process of outputting (setting) the data set in the A register to the test output port PO7 is performed. As a result, a winning information test signal carrying actual winning information (here, winning item winning information) is output (transmitted) to the test apparatus from the test output port PO7.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step MT35 that it is not the timing of outputting the winning item winning information, the process proceeds to step MT39, and the address of the winning / RP combination determination result number storage area (see FIG. 27C) is set. . Specifically, the upper value “F0H” of the address value “F048H” of the winning / RP combination determination result number storage area is set in the H register, and the lower value “48H” of the address value “F048H” is set in the L register. Perform the setting process. Next, output data of winning / RP winning information is set (step MT40). Specifically, a process of setting the winning / RP combination determination result number data stored in the winning / RP combination determination result number storage area in the A register is performed. Further, the data of the winning / RP identifier is set (step MT41). Specifically, a process of setting bit 6 of the A register to “1” and bit 7 to “0” is performed. Then, a winning information test signal is output (step MT42). Specifically, a process of outputting (setting) the data set in the A register to the test output port PO7 is performed. As a result, a winning information test signal carrying actual winning information (here, winning / RP winning information) is output (transmitted) to the test apparatus from the test output port PO7.

If it is determined in step MT34 that it is not the output timing of the winning information, the process proceeds to step MT42 without performing the processes of steps MT35 to MT41 and outputs a winning information test signal. In this case, a winning information test signal (a signal of “00000000B”) that does not carry actual winning information is output (transmitted) from the test output port PO7 to the test apparatus. As a modified example, if it is determined in step MT34 that it is not the output timing of the winning information, the output of the winning information test signal may not be performed (return directly from step MT34).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, during a period in which the value of the winning information output period timer is from “24” to “13”, the winning information test signal carrying the bonus information is output, and the winning information output period timer is output. During the period from "12" to "1", a winning information test signal carrying winning / RP winning information is output. During the period when the value of the winning information output period timer is “0”, a winning information test signal that does not carry actual winning information is output. As described above, the winning information output period timer is set when the slot machine 1 determines that the slot machine 1 has the test specification, and is not set when the slot machine 1 determines that the slot machine 1 has the mass production specification (the timer value is always “0”). Therefore, in the mass production specification, a winning information test signal carrying actual winning information is not output. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the winning information from being illegally acquired from the winning information test signal.

As a modified example of the test signal etc. output process (for example, an example corresponding to the above-described reel rotation start preparation process (modified example K5)), a test signal etc. output process (modified example L1) shown in FIG. 48 is executed. Is also good. Steps MT31A to MT34A and MT35A to MT42A in the test signal etc. output process (Modification L1) are the same as steps MT31 to MT34 and MT35 to MT42 in the above test signal etc. output process. The difference is that when it is determined in step MT34A that it is the output timing of the winning information, it is determined whether or not the slot machine 1 has the test specifications (specific methods for determining may be the various methods described above. ) (Step MT3401A), and when it is determined that the specification is not the test specification (is the mass production specification), output data of dummy winning information (for example, “11111111B”) is set (Step MT3402A).
On the point. That is, in this test signal etc. output process (Modification L1), even when the winning information is output, if it is determined that the specification is for mass production, a winning information test signal carrying dummy winning information is output. It has become so.

  Further, as another modified example of the test signal output processing (for example, an example corresponding to the above-described reel rotation start preparation processing (modified example K6)), the test signal etc. output processing (modified example L2) shown in FIG. 49 is executed. You may make it. Steps MT31A to MT34A and MT42A in the test signal etc. output process (Modification L2) are the same as steps MT31 to MT34 and MT42 in the above test signal etc. output process. Further, in step MT34B, when it is determined that it is the output timing of the winning information, it is determined whether or not the slot machine 1 has the test specification (the specific determining method may employ the various methods described above). (Step MT3401B) If it is determined that the specification is not the test specification (it is the mass production specification), the output data of the dummy winning information is set (Step MT3402B). It is. The difference is that the processes of steps MT3403B to MT3406B are performed.

That is, when it is determined in step MT3401B that the test specification is satisfied, the process proceeds to step MT3403B, and the address of the accessory winning information storage area (see FIG. 29B) is set (step MT3403B). Specifically, a process of setting the upper value “F0H” of the address value “F04DH” of the bonus item winning information storage area in the H register, and setting the lower value “4DH” of the address value “F04DH” in the L register. I do. Next, it is determined whether or not it is the output timing of the bonus item winning information (step MT3404B). If it is not the output timing of the bonus item winning information, a winning / RP winning information storage area (see FIG. 29A) Is set (step MT3405B). Specifically, the upper value “F0H” of the address value “F04CH” of the winning / RP winning information storage area is set in the H register, and the lower value “4CH” of the address value “F04CH” is set in the L register. Perform processing. Then, the output data of the winning information is set (step MT3406B). More specifically, if the address of the bonus item winning information storage area is set in the HL register, the data of the bonus item winning information is set in the A register, and the address of the winning / RP winning information storage area is set in the HL register. If so, a process of setting the data of the winning / RP winning information in the A register is performed. As described above, in the test signal etc. output processing (Modification L2), since the data of the winning information to which the data of the identifier is already added is directly set and output, the processing of setting the data of the identifier is not performed.

  Other control processes performed by the main control unit 100 include a main control power-on process and a main control setting change process. The main control power-on process is a process that is performed when power supply to the main control unit 100 is started (when the power is turned on). The processing is performed so that the power recovery processing can be performed. Further, it is determined whether or not the setting key type switch 83 is ON. If the setting key type switch 83 is ON, the process proceeds to a main control setting change process described below. On the other hand, when the setting key type switch 83 is not turned on, the stack pointer is restored and an interrupt is activated, and further, information related to the combination determination result stored in a predetermined storage area when the power is turned off, and the like. A game is played based on information on the RT state and the like.

  The main control setting change process is a process executed when the setting key type switch 83 is turned on in the above-described main control power-on process, and a setting change command operation of the setting change switch 84 by a game clerk or the like is confirmed. In this case, initialization of the stack pointer, initialization of the interrupt, and clearing of the game information stored when the power is turned off are performed. Further, the set value set at the time of setting change is stored in a predetermined storage area, and the process proceeds to the above-described game progress control processing.

<Program start processing>
Next, a program start process executed by the sub main control unit 200A will be described. This program start processing is started when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 50 (A), interrupts are firstly inhibited (step U11), and then various initialization processings (initialization of CPU and RAM) are performed. And calculation of a checksum, etc.) (Step U12). Next, it is determined whether or not the checksum value calculated when the power is turned on matches the stored checksum value calculated when the power is turned off (step U13).

  Here, if they match, it is determined whether or not the power has been recovered from the power-off state during one command processing of the sub-main loop processing described below (hereinafter, referred to as “complete recovery”) ( (Step U14) If complete recovery, interrupt permission is permitted (step U15), and the processing returns to the one command processing that was being executed when the power was turned off. On the other hand, if the checksums do not match in the determination in step U13, the RAM is cleared (step U16), and the processing shifts to the sub main loop processing. If it is determined in step U14 that the return is not complete, the process directly proceeds to the sub-main loop process.

<Sub main loop processing>
In the sub main loop process, as shown in FIG. 50B, first, a WDT (watch dog timer) is cleared (step V11), and then the operation of the WDT is started (step V12). Next, an interrupt is permitted (step V13), and processing is performed every 16 ms (monitoring of whether or not the image display device is operating normally, timing of power-on time, and signal data (command) to be transmitted to the image display device in a predetermined manner. (Eg, storage in a storage area (command buffer)) (step V14).

  Next, one command processing (processing based on a control command from the main control means 100, an example of which will be described later) is performed (step V15), and it is determined whether 16 ms (time can be set arbitrarily) has elapsed. (Step V16) If the time has not elapsed, the process returns to step V15. On the other hand, if 16 ms has elapsed, the process returns to step V11.

<Power off processing>
The power-off processing shown in FIG. 50 (C) is started when the sub-main control unit 200A detects the power-off. First, the WDT is stopped (step W11), and then the program start processing is being performed. It is determined whether or not (Step W12). Here, if the program is not being started, the checksum is calculated (step W13), and various data (the checksum calculation result, the address of the program being executed, etc.) are saved (held) (step W14). Proceed to step W15. On the other hand, if it is determined in step W12 that the program is being started, the process proceeds to step W15 without performing the processes in steps W13 and W14.

  In this step W15, it is determined whether or not 500 ms (the time can be set arbitrarily) has elapsed. Here, if 500 ms has elapsed, the power-off processing ends. On the other hand, if 500 ms has not elapsed, it is determined whether or not the power has been restored (step W16). Here, if the power is restored, the number of instantaneous interruptions is updated (step W17), the operation of the WDT is started (step W18), and the process returns to the process being executed when the power is turned off. On the other hand, if it is determined in step W16 that the power has not been restored, the process returns to step W15.

<1 command processing>
In the one-command processing shown in FIG. 51A, it is determined whether or not a control command (hereinafter, referred to as a “special combination command”) including information on the combination determination result number of the special item has been received (step V101). Here, when the special combination command is received, the process proceeds to step V102, and the process at the time of the start lever is executed. In the processing at the time of the start lever, as shown in FIG. 51B, first, it is determined whether or not the pressing order instruction number is any of A1 to A9 (the pressing order is earlier than the special role command). Since the control command including the instruction number information has been received, the determination is made based on the control command (step V121). Here, when the push order instruction number is any of A1 to A9, a push order navigation effect corresponding to the received push order instruction number is performed (step V122), and the process returns. On the other hand, when the push order instruction number is not A1 to A9 (in the case of A0), the process returns without performing the process of step V122.

  With the return from the processing at the time of the start lever, the one-command processing shown in FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in step V101 of the one-command processing that the special combination command has not been received, the process proceeds to step V103, and a control command including reel rotation start information (hereinafter, referred to as “reel rotation start command”) Is determined. Here, when the reel rotation start command is received, the process proceeds to step V104, where processing such as effect switching is performed, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the reel rotation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to step V105 to determine whether a control command including the information of the first body stop reception (hereinafter, referred to as a “first body stop reception command”) has been received. Determine whether or not. Here, when the first body stop reception command is received, the process proceeds to step V106, and the processing at the time of receiving the first body stop is performed.

  In the process at the time of receiving the first trunk stop, as shown in FIG. 52 (A), first, it is determined whether or not the push order navigation effect is being executed (step V141). Here, when the push order navigation effect is not being executed, the process at the time of receiving the first trunk stop is ended and the process returns. On the other hand, when the push order navigation effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step V142, and it is determined whether the first push order executed by the player is correct. Here, if the answer is correct, the process proceeds to step V143 to perform a process of switching the pressing order navigation effect (including erasing the display of the first pressing order) and return. On the other hand, if the push order is incorrect, the process proceeds to step V144 to end the push order navigation effect, and executes a failed effect (effect notifying that the push order is incorrect) (step V145), and returns. I do.

In the return from the processing at the time of receiving the first body stop, the one-command processing shown in FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in step V105 of the one-command processing that the first body stop acceptance command has not been received, the process proceeds to step V107, and the control command including the information of the first body stop (hereinafter, “first (Referred to as a “turning cylinder stop command”) is determined. Here, when the first body stop command is received, the process proceeds to step V108, where a process of displaying a winning expectation display (including a stop sound) is performed, and the process returns. On the other hand, when the first body stop command has not been received, the process proceeds to step V109, and a control command including information on the second body stop reception (hereinafter, referred to as a “second body stop reception command”) is received. It is determined whether or not it has been performed. Here, when the second body stop reception command is received, the process proceeds to step V110, and the processing at the time of the second body stop reception is performed.

  In the process at the time of receiving the second trunk stop, as shown in FIG. 52B, first, it is determined whether or not the push order navigation effect is being executed (step V151). Here, if the push order navigation effect is not being executed, the process at the time of receiving the second body stop is ended and the process returns. On the other hand, when the pressing order navigation effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step V152, and it is determined whether or not the second pressing order executed by the player is correct. Here, if the answer is correct, the process proceeds to step V153, the process of switching the pressing order navigation effect is performed (including the deletion of the display of the second pressing order), and the process returns. On the other hand, when the push order is incorrect, the process proceeds to step V154, ends the push order navigation effect, executes a failed effect (step V155), and returns.

  In the return from the processing at the time of receiving the second body stop, the one-command processing shown in FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in step V109 of the one-command processing that the second body stop reception command has not been received, the process proceeds to step V111, and the control command including the information of the second body stop (hereinafter referred to as “second body stop”). (Referred to as a “turning cylinder stop command”) is determined. Here, when the second body stop command is received, the process proceeds to step V112, where processing of a winning expectation display (including a case where a stop sound, a tempai sound is output, and the like) is performed, and the process returns. On the other hand, when the second torso stop command has not been received, the process proceeds to step V113, and a control command including the information of the third torso stop reception (hereinafter, referred to as “third torso stop reception command”) is received. It is determined whether or not it has been performed. Here, when the third body stop reception command is received, the process proceeds to step V114, and the processing at the time of receiving the third body stop is performed.

  In the process at the time of accepting the third torso stop, as shown in FIG. 52C, first, it is determined whether or not the push order navigation effect is being executed (step V161). Here, if the push order navigation effect is not being executed, the process for accepting the third torso stop is ended and the process returns. On the other hand, when the push order navigation effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step V162, ends the push order navigation effect, and returns.

  In the return from the processing at the time of receiving the third body stop, the one-command processing shown in FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in step V113 of the one-command processing that the third body stop acceptance command has not been received, the process proceeds to step V115, and the control command including the information of the third body stop (hereinafter, “third body stop”) is executed. (Referred to as a “turning cylinder stop command”) is determined. Here, when the third body stop command is received, the process proceeds to step V116, where a process of displaying a winning expectation display (including a stop sound) is performed, and the process returns. On the other hand, when the third body stop command has not been received, the process proceeds to step V117, and it is determined whether or not a control command (all body stop command) including the information of the stop display symbol has been received. Here, if the all-round body stop command has been received, the process proceeds to step V118, where processing such as effect switching is performed, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the all-round trunk stop command has not been received, the routine returns.

<< 2nd Embodiment >>
Hereinafter, a slot machine according to the second embodiment (hereinafter, also referred to as “slot machine of the second embodiment”) will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. The slot machine of the second embodiment has the same configuration of the main part as the slot machine 1 of the above-described first embodiment, and the description of the common part will be omitted. Also, the flow of the main control process is common to that of the first embodiment, and the description thereof is also omitted.

<Circuit configuration of main control board (difference between test specification and mass production specification)>
In the slot machine 1 described above, by connecting a pull-up resistor, a pull-down resistor, or a voltage dividing circuit to the terminal PI0 of the main IC, the potential of the terminal PI0 differs between the test specification and the mass production specification. (See FIGS. 24 and 25). On the other hand, in the slot machine of the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, in the case of the test specification, the terminal PI0 of the main IC and the terminal Q7 of the test IC 2 (the terminal for outputting a signal from the terminal D7 of the main IC) are used. ) Is provided (hereinafter referred to as “special circuit”) (see FIG. 1A). In the case of mass-production specification, such a special circuit is not provided since the test IC 2 is not mounted (see FIG. (See FIG. (B)).

<Test signal output processing>
In the above-described slot machine 1, the control processing when outputting each test signal of the symbol stop test signal, the operation state test signal, and the winning information test signal to the test apparatus when the test specification is satisfied, has been described. In the slot machine according to the embodiment, in addition to the above, a control process for outputting an RT information test signal for transmitting an RT setting state will be described. Regarding the output of the symbol stop test signal, the same control processing as the first embodiment (symbol stop test signal output processing shown in FIG. 37) is performed. A control process different from that of the first embodiment is performed. Hereinafter, a control process regarding the output of the RT information test signal, the operation state test signal, and the winning information test signal will be described.

First, in the present embodiment, a modified example J1 shown in FIG. 32B is employed as a test specification determination preparation process executed when the power is turned on. That is, when the power is turned on, the processing for determining whether the specification is the test specification or the mass production specification is not particularly performed. Further, at the start of the game (before the start lever operation is accepted), as shown in FIG. 54A, a process of setting an RT information output timing identification flag (step S2011) is executed (for example, the game start shown in FIG. 34). Execute as one step in the process). The RT information output timing identification flag is a flag set in a predetermined storage area (8-bit storage area) such as a RAM for identifying whether it is a timing to output an RT information test signal or not. The hour is set to a value of "10000000B". After the RT information output timing identification flag is set, a process of updating the RT information output timing identification flag (step S2021) is executed each time a timer interrupt is executed, as shown in FIG. This is executed as a process in timer measurement (step MT14) in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 46). The updating process at this time is performed as a process of right-shifting the value of the RT information output timing identification flag by one bit and maintaining the value of bit 7. Further, when the start lever operation is received, as shown in FIG. 54 (C), a process of clearing the RT information output timing identification flag (setting to the value of “00000000B”) (step S2031) is executed (for example, FIG. The processing is executed between the processing of steps S102E and S104E of the reel rotation start preparation processing (Modification K5) shown in FIG. 39 (A)).

The value of the RT information output timing identification flag set as described above is set to “10000000B” every time the timer interrupt processing is executed from the time the game is started to the time the flag is cleared when the start lever operation is received. ”(When set) →“ 11000000B ”→“ 11100000B ”→“ 11110000B ”→“ 11111000B ”→“ 11111100B ”→“ 11111110B ”→“ 11111111B ”→“ 11111111B ”... Until the value is updated, the value of “00000000B” is updated so as to be maintained as it is. The RT information output timing identification flag is used to identify whether or not it is the output timing of the RT information test signal in a test signal etc. output process described below.

  The output processing for test signals and the like in the present embodiment replaces the output processing for test signals and the like (see FIG. 47) executed in step MT21 of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 46, and as shown in FIG. First, it is determined whether the inspection signal has been input ON (step MT131). The inspection signal is a signal of “0” or “1” output from the terminal D7 of the main IC to the terminal D7 of the test IC 2, the terminal Q7, and the terminal PI0 via the special circuit. Then, bit 7 (normally set to “0”) of the operation state test signal is set to “1” (hereinafter referred to as “set the inspection signal to ON”) and output, so that “1” is output. By outputting the inspection signal, setting it to “0” (hereinafter referred to as “setting the inspection signal to OFF”), and outputting it, the inspection signal of “0” is output (this is described below. , The potential of the terminal PI0 is read, and if it is “1” (H level), it is determined that the inspection signal is ON, and if it is “0” (L level), it is determined that the inspection signal is OFF.

  Here, when it is determined that the inspection signal is ON, the process proceeds to step MT132, and the winning information output prohibition flag is set to ON. The winning information output prohibition flag is a flag set in a predetermined bit (for example, bit 0) of a predetermined storage area such as a RAM for determining whether or not the actual output of the winning information is prohibited. The inspection signal is input ON only during a period from step MT135 to step MT148 described later, and during the other periods, the inspection signal is normally input OFF. Therefore, the winning information output prohibition flag is set to ON when the potential of the terminal PI0 is forcibly set to "1" due to fraud or the like. In this embodiment, once the winning information output prohibition flag is set to ON, the winning information test signal carrying the actual winning information is not output, thereby preventing the winning information from being illegally acquired. Can be prevented. In addition, when the winning information output prohibition flag is set to ON, an error notification may be performed. Further, when a predetermined error canceling operation is performed according to the error notification, the winning information output prohibition flag may be set to OFF.

After the winning information output prohibition flag is set to ON in step MT132, or when it is determined in step MT131 that the inspection signal is OFF, the process proceeds to step MT133 to determine whether the winning information output prohibition flag is ON. . Here, when it is determined that the winning information output prohibition flag is not ON (OFF), it is determined whether it is time to start outputting RT information or winning information (step MT134). Specifically, when the value of the RT information output timing identification flag is “10000000B”, it is determined that it is the RT information output start timing, and when the value of the winning information output period timer is “24”, the output of the winning information is determined. It is determined that it is the start timing, and otherwise, it is determined that it is not the output start timing. Here, if it is determined that it is time to start outputting the RT information or the winning information, the process proceeds to step MT135, outputs an operation state test signal in which the inspection signal is set to ON, and proceeds to step MT136. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the timing to start outputting the RT information or the winning information, the process proceeds to step MT136 without performing the process of step MT135.

In this step MT136, it is determined whether or not the winning information output flag is ON. The winning information output flag is set in a predetermined bit (for example, bit 0) of a predetermined storage area such as a RAM, and is a flag for determining whether output of actual winning information is permitted. Are set to ON in step MT138 described later, and set to OFF in step MT145. Here, when it is determined that the winning information output flag is not ON (OFF), it is determined whether the inspection signal is input ON (step MT137), and when it is determined that the inspection signal is ON, the winning information output is performed. The flag is set to ON (step MT138), and the process proceeds to step MT139. On the other hand, if it is determined in step MT136 that the winning information output flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step MT139 without performing the processes in steps MT137 and MT138.

In step MT139, output data of the RT information is set. Specifically, a process of setting the data value of the RT information stored in a predetermined storage area such as a RAM in the A register is performed. Next, it is determined whether or not it is the output timing of the RT information (step MT140). Specifically, when the value of the RT information output timing identification flag is other than “00000000B”, RT
It is determined that it is the output timing of the information, and when the value of the winning information output period timer is “00000000B”, it is determined that it is not the output timing of the RT information. If it is determined that it is the output timing of the RT information, the process proceeds to step MT147, and outputs the RT information test signal. Specifically, a process of outputting (setting) the data set in the A register to the test output port PO7 is performed. As a result, the RT information test signal carrying the RT information is output (transmitted) from the test output port PO7 to the test apparatus.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the output timing of the RT information, the process proceeds to step MT141, and the output data of the winning item winning information is set. Specifically, a process of setting the data of the combination determination result number of the bonus stored in the bonus combination determination result number storage area (see FIG. 27D) to the A register is performed. Next, it is determined whether or not it is the output timing of the winning combination information (step MT142). Specifically, when the value of the winning information output period timer stored in the winning information output period timer storage area (see FIG. 27 (F)) is “24 to 13”, the output timing of the bonus item winning information is determined. It is determined that there is, and if the value is any other value, it is determined that it is not the output timing of the winning combination information. Here, if it is determined that it is the output timing of the bonus item winning information, the process proceeds to step MT147 to output a bonus item winning information test signal. More specifically, a process of adding data of the identifier of the accessory to the data set in the A register and outputting (setting) the data to the test output port PO7 is performed. As a result, a bonus item winning information test signal carrying the bonus item winning information is output (transmitted) to the test apparatus from the test output port PO7. When the above-described bonus item winning information storage area (see FIG. 29B) is provided, the data of the bonus item winning information stored therein is set in the A register, and the data is stored in the test apparatus. You may make it output.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the output timing of the winning item winning information, the process proceeds to step MT143, and the output data of the winning / RP winning information is set. Specifically, a process of setting the data of the winning / RP combination determination result number stored in the winning / RP combination determination result number storage area (see FIG. 27C) in the A register is performed. Next, it is determined whether or not it is the output timing of the winning / RP winning information (step MT144). Specifically, when the value of the winning information output period timer is “12 to 1”, it is determined that it is the output timing of the winning / RP winning information, and when the value is any other value, the winning / RP winning information of the winning / RP winning information is determined. It is determined that it is not the output timing. Here, if it is determined that it is the timing to output the winning / RP winning information, the process proceeds to step MT147 to output a winning / RP winning information test signal. Specifically, a process of adding the winning / RP identifier data to the data set in the A register and outputting (setting) it to the test output port PO7 is performed. Thereby, the winning / RP winning information test signal carrying the winning / RP winning information is output (transmitted) to the test apparatus from the test output port PO7. When the above-described winning / RP winning information storage area (see FIG. 29A) is provided, the data of the winning / RP winning information stored therein is set in the A register, and the test is performed. You may make it output to an apparatus.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the timing of winning / RP winning information output, the process proceeds to step MT145, and the winning information output flag is set to OFF. Next, empty winning information is set. Specifically, a process of setting data of “00000000B” to the A register as empty winning information is performed. Next, the process proceeds to step MT147 to output a winning information test signal carrying empty winning information. Specifically, a process of outputting (setting) the data of “00000000B” set in the A register to the test output port PO7 is performed. As a result, a winning information test signal that does not carry actual winning information is output (transmitted) to the test apparatus from the test output port PO7. Further, an operation state test signal in which the inspection signal is set to OFF is output (step MT148), and the process returns. If it is determined in step MT133 that the winning information output prohibition flag is ON, the process proceeds to step MT146 without performing the processing from step MT134 to MT145, and in step MT137, it is not the input of the inspection signal ON. When the determination is made, the process proceeds to step MT145 without performing the processes of steps MT138 to MT144.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the actual winning information is output only when the winning information output flag is set to ON and within the winning information output period. The winning information output flag outputs an operation state test signal in which the inspection signal is set to ON in the timer interrupt processing executed at the time of starting the output of the RT information or the winning information, and thereafter, within the same timer interrupt processing. Is set from OFF to ON only when the inspection signal ON input is confirmed. If the check signal ON input is confirmed at a timing other than the above timing, the winning information output prohibition flag is set to ON, so that actual winning information is not output. For this reason, even if the potential of the terminal PI0 is forcibly set to "1" and the erroneous recognition as the inspection signal ON input is attempted to illegally acquire the winning information, it is necessary to output the actual winning information. It is necessary to set the potential of the terminal PI0 to "1" at the above timing, which is very difficult. As described above, in the slot machine of the present embodiment, it is extremely difficult to illegally obtain actual winning information from the winning information test signal.

<Modification>
Hereinafter, the modification will be described.
In the above embodiment, the control program for the symbol stop test signal output processing is stored in the second PRG area, but may be stored in the first PRG area. In this case, it is preferable that the data of the stop acceptance designation tables T1 and T2 are also stored in the first PRG area. Further, a control program for a test signal etc. output process (including each modified example) in the timer interrupt process may be stored in the second PRG area, or a process for determining whether or not the test specification is satisfied. The control program (including each modified example) may be stored in the second PRG area. Further, the winning information output period timer may be set in the second PRG area, and a control program for setting, updating, and clearing the timer value may be stored in the second PRG area.

  In the above-described embodiment, the notification of the pressing order is performed from the time when the operation of the start lever is received to the time when each reel enters the constant speed rotation state. In some games, the time until the start lever operation is accepted may be less than the minimum game time (particularly, there is a margin until the minimum game time elapses). The notification of the pressing order may be performed after the minimum game time for the next game is set without performing the notification. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the time period during which the stop switch cannot be operated even though the pressing order is notified.

Although not set in the above embodiment, a pressing order flag may be set as an index for identifying whether or not the pressing order can be notified (in the above embodiment, the game mode Thus, whether or not the push order can be notified is identified.) When the pressing order flag is ON, it indicates that the notification of the pressing order is possible, and when the pressing order flag is OFF, it indicates that the notification of the pressing order is not possible. By providing such a push order flag, it is possible to distinguish between a case where the push order can be notified and a case where the push order cannot be notified, even in the same game mode. For example, even in the game mode 0 (normal time), it is possible to set a situation in which the pressing order flag is turned on, and to execute the pressing order game there. In the above-described embodiment, the game modes 2 (AT preparation) and 3 (AT) are managed as different game modes. However, these are managed as one game mode, and whether the mode is preparing for AT or during AT. The AT flag may be set as an index for identifying whether the mode is the mode. When the AT flag is ON, it indicates that the mode is during AT, and when the AT flag is OFF, it indicates that the mode is during AT preparation.

  In the above-described embodiment, after the pressing order notification by the WIN lamp 46j is started, each information of the pressing order instruction number, the effect group number, and the role determination result number of the accessory is determined in this order to indicate that the reel is in the constant rotation state. Before being transmitted to the sub-control means (see FIG. 22). In order to ensure that the push order is notified (push order navigation effect) by the liquid crystal display device before the reel enters the constant speed rotation state, the push order instruction number, It is preferable that each information of the effect group number and the combination determination result number of the accessory is set in a transmission buffer to the sub-control means. When the push order flag is provided, it is preferable that the information of the push order flag be transmitted to the sub before the information of the effect group number and the combination determination result number of the accessory. This is because, in the process at the time of accepting the start lever operation, in order to execute the notification of the pressing order by the liquid crystal display device, it is necessary to confirm whether or not the pressing order flag is ON at that time.

  In the above embodiment, the game mode information and the RT state information are transmitted to the sub-control means after the start lever operation is received. However, the game mode information and the RT state information may be transmitted before the start lever operation is received. Good. By doing so, the sub-control means can know the information of the game mode and the information of the RT state before accepting the operation of the start lever, so that each process can be smoothly executed at the time of accepting the start lever operation. it can. For example, when the game mode shifts from the game mode 1 (forewarning) to the game mode 2 (AT preparation), a confirmation screen indicating that the AT setting has been confirmed may be displayed, but before the start lever operation is accepted, the game mode 2 is displayed. By knowing that the operation will shift to (AT preparation), it is possible to smoothly display the confirmation screen when the start lever operation is received. In addition, the number of AT games (remaining number) may be displayed when the game mode shifts from the game mode 2 (AT preparation) to the game mode 3 (AT). In such a case, the game may be performed before the start lever operation is accepted. By knowing that the mode will shift to the mode 3 (AT), the number of AT games can be smoothly displayed when the start lever operation is received (specifically, before the start lever operation is received, the RAM is displayed). The data of the number of AT games (“50”) can be set in a predetermined storage area such as (RAM 77) and the data can be displayed on the liquid crystal display device when the start lever operation is received. (It is possible to display the data faster than in the case where the data of the number ("50") is set and then the data is displayed on the liquid crystal display device.) When the AT flag is provided, it is preferable to transmit the information of the AT flag before accepting the operation of the start lever.

In the above-described embodiment, as described above, in order to prevent intentionally staying in the game mode 2 (AT preparation), if the player does not follow the push order navigation in the game mode 2, the game mode is shifted to the game mode 3 (AT). The AT counter is set. In this case, it is only necessary to determine whether or not the push order operation along the push order navigation has been performed in the game mode 2, so that the processing load can be reduced. When the push order operation is performed, the game mode is shifted to the game mode 3. Therefore, when the player does not follow the replay navigation, the game mode is shifted to the game mode 3. However, when the player does not follow the bell navigation (when the player is merely disadvantageous), the game mode 3 is not shifted. Good. In this case, it is possible to rescue a player who did not follow the bell navigation by mistake, but it is necessary to determine whether the player did not follow the replay navigation or did not follow the bell navigation, thereby increasing the processing load. In addition, when the player does not follow the pushing order navigation and the RT state falls, the game mode shifts to the game mode 3. When the player does not follow the pushing order navigation but the RT state does not fall, the game mode goes to the game mode 3. You may not make it do. In this case, it is necessary to determine whether or not the RT state has fallen, in addition to determining whether or not the pressing order navigation has been followed, so that the processing load increases. Further, in the above embodiment, when the game mode 2 is set, the RT state is set to RT3 so that the game mode is shifted to the game mode 3; You may make it transfer to the game mode 3.

  In the above embodiment, if the answer is correct for the pressing order game, the AT stock number is added. However, adding the AT game number (addition of the AT game number) may be a privilege. In addition, a privilege (for example, executing a special image effect) may be provided in the sub-control unit.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the setting is changed, the information on the AT (the number of AT games and the number of AT stocks) is cleared, but the information on the RT state is maintained. It also has many RT states. On the other hand, only the non-internal (RT1) and the bonus (RT1) and the bonus (RT2), which do not have many RT gaming states and have not been won as the bonus role, are not in the bonus role. Even if the specification is such that the bonus is mostly inside the bonus during the game period (internal specification), when the setting is changed, the information on the AT is cleared, but the information on the RT state is maintained. Is also good. When the power is turned off, it is preferable that information on the AT is also maintained and information on the RT state is also maintained (the same may be applied to a case where the internal specification is set).

In the above embodiment, the command transmission is performed by the serial communication method, but it has been described that the command transmission may be performed by the parallel communication method. However, in the case of the parallel communication method, even if any one of the plurality of communication lines is disconnected, communication becomes possible, so that erroneous information may be transmitted. Therefore, in the case of using the parallel communication method, a predetermined command (for example, “00000101B”) is transmitted at the start of each game (for example, when the start lever is operated), and at the end of each game (for example, At the time of stop, a predetermined command and a command in which each bit “0” and “1” are reversed (for example, “1111010B”) are transmitted, and it is determined whether or not the wire is disconnected based on the result of these logical operations. You may make it.

  In the above embodiment, if the sub-control means does not receive the pressing order instruction number or if there is no pressing order to be notified with priority, the sub-control means causes the effect transmitted from the main control means. The pressing order may be notified based on the group number or the combination determination result number.

  In the above embodiment, one terminal (terminal PI0) is used to determine whether the specification is the test specification or the mass production specification, but a plurality of terminals may be used. In addition, the embodiments and the modifications described above can be used in appropriate combinations.

<< 3rd Embodiment >>
Next, with respect to the slot machine according to the third embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as “slot machine of the third mode”), specifically, the lighting timing of a plurality of display lamps when a replaying game is established will be described. This will be described with additional reference to FIGS. The slot machine according to the third embodiment includes a replay lamp, a 1 BET lamp, a 2 BET lamp, a 3 BET lamp, a start lamp, and a medal insertion possible lamp as display lamps including an LED lamp and the like.

The replay lamp indicates that a symbol combination (also referred to as a “replay symbol”) corresponding to a replay game in the previous game (a replay symbol (also referred to as a “replay symbol”) in a previous game is stopped and displayed on an activated line. Is a game that can be executed without betting a game medal held by the player), and corresponds to the re-game display lamp 46e described above. The 1-BET lamp is a lamp indicating that the number of bets on the game medals is 1 or more, and corresponds to the above-described 1-BET display lamp 46bA. The 2BET lamp is a lamp indicating that the bet number of the game medal is 2 or more, and corresponds to the above-described 2-BET display lamp 46bB. The 3BET lamp is a lamp indicating that the bet number of the game medal is 3, and corresponds to the above-described MAX-BET display lamp 46b. The start lamp is a lamp indicating that the start lever operation can be started (a state in which the game can be started by operating the start lever), and corresponds to the game start display lamp 46d described above. The medal insertion possible lamp is a lamp indicating that a game medal can be inserted, and corresponds to the above-mentioned insertion possible display lamp 46c.

  When the replaying game is established (when the replay symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line), the next game is a replay game, and the same number of game medals as the number of bets in the previous game are bet by the automatic bet processing. . At the time of a replay game, the player does not need to bet his own game medal (cannot bet himself), so if a role other than a replay is established in the previous game or if the player loses, Operating procedures performed by the user are significantly different. Therefore, if the current game is a replay game, and it is difficult for the player to understand that a game medal is automatically bet, the player may be confused. Therefore, at the time of the replay game, at what timing the replay lamp, the 1 BET lamp, the 2 BET lamp, the 3 BET lamp, the start lamp, and the medal insertion possible lamp are turned on is important for performing a smooth game. .

  FIGS. 56 to 60 exemplify ten patterns with respect to the lighting timings of these display lamps, and these will be sequentially described below. In each of the patterns, the previous game is not a replay game, and the bet number in the previous game is “3”. Further, it is assumed that after the replay symbol is displayed, the third stop switch (the stop switch at which the third stop operation is performed) is switched from the on state to the off state (the hand is separated from the third stop switch). . In FIG. 56 to FIG. 60, the timing when the replay symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line is indicated as a timing that can be a trigger for switching between the lighting state and the non-lighting state of each display lamp (indicated as “at the time of displaying a replay symbol” in the drawings). At the time when the third stop switch is switched from the on state to the off state (indicated as “when the third stop switch is off” in the figure), and the state where the start lever can be operated to start the game (operation of the start lever) (A state where the start lever operation can be started) in FIG. Further, in the following description, for the sake of convenience, a period from the time of displaying the replay symbol to the time when the start lever operation can be started is referred to as a “replay game preparation period”, of which a period from the time of displaying the replay symbol to the time of turning off the third stop switch. The period is referred to as “first half period of replay game preparation”, and the period from when the third stop switch is turned off to when the start lever operation can be started is referred to as “second half period of replay game preparation”. Note that the length of the horizontal axis (distance between each time point) in each of the timing patterns 1 to 10 does not accurately represent the actual time.

In the lighting timing pattern 1 shown in FIG. 56 (A), the replay lamp, the start lamp, and the medal insertion possible lamp are in the non-lighting state during a predetermined period before the display of the replay symbol, and the 1BET lamp, the 2BET lamp, and the 3BET lamp are The lighting state is set (this point is the same in other lighting timing patterns 2 to 10). Immediately after the replay symbol is displayed (at substantially the same time), the replay lamp switches from the non-lighting state to the lighting state, and the 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp switch from the lighting state to the non-lighting state. On the other hand, the 1BET lamp remains in the lighting state, and the start lamp and the medal insertion possible lamp remain in the non-lighting state. After the replay symbol is displayed, the 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp, which have been switched from the lighting state to the non-lighting state, are first switched from the non-lighting state to the third stop switch-off period (first half of the replay game preparation). The state is switched to the lighting state, and then the 3BET lamp is switched from the non-lighting state to the lighting state.

  In the period from when the third stop switch is turned off to when the start lever operation can be started (the latter half of the replay game preparation), the lighting / non-lighting state of each display lamp does not change. That is, the replay lamp, the 1 BET lamp, the 2 BET lamp, and the 3 BET lamp that are lit when the third stop switch is off remain lit during the second half of the replay game preparation, and are not lit when the third stop switch is off. , The start lamp and the medal insertion possible lamp remain in the non-lighting state during the latter half of the replay game preparation. At the time when the start lever operation can be started, the start lamp switches from the non-lighting state to the lighting state, but there is no change in the lighting / non-lighting state of the other display lamps. In this lighting timing pattern 1, the medal insertion possible lamp is maintained in the non-lighting state even after the start lever operation start possible time has elapsed. This is because during the period of the replay game, even if the number of stored game medals has not reached the upper limit, it is specified that game medals cannot be inserted. Even returned. In addition, when the medal insertion is enabled during the replay game, the medal insertion enabled lamp may be switched from the non-lighting state to the lighting state simultaneously with the start lamp.

  As described above, in the lighting timing pattern 1, the end points of the replay game preparation period (the end points of the period, that is, the time when the replay symbol is displayed and the start lever operation can be started are not included, but both end points are included, or The end point may be included) and the period before and after that, and the 1BET lamp is maintained in the lighting state. The replay lamp is switched from the non-lighting state to the lighting state before the start lamp. Furthermore, the replay lamp is included in the first half period of the replay game preparation (excluding the end points of the period, that is, not including the time of displaying the replay symbol and the time of turning off the third stop switch, but including the end points, or including any one of the end points). Good), the lamp is turned on (switches from a non-lighting state to a lighting state) before the 2BET lamp, the 3BET lamp, and the medal insertion possible lamp. Further, the 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp are simultaneously turned off immediately after the replay symbol display (switching from the lighting state to the non-lighting state), and then sequentially switching from the non-lighting state to the lighting state within the first half period of the replay game preparation. It has become. Immediately after displaying the replay symbol, the 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp are turned off at the same time as the replay lamp is turned on.

  In the lighting timing pattern 2 shown in FIG. 56 (B), the replay lamp is in a non-lighting state from before the display of the replay symbol, through the display of the replay symbol and the time when the third stop switch is turned off, and immediately before the start lever operation can be started. The state is maintained, and the state is switched from the non-lighting state to the lighting state immediately before the start lever operation can be started. The 1 BET lamp, the 2 BET lamp, and the 3 BET lamp are maintained in the lighting state during the replay game preparation period and before and after the period. The start lamp and the medal insertion possible lamp are maintained in a non-lighting state from before the replay symbol display until the start lever operation can be started after the replay symbol display and the third stop switch off, and the start lever operation can be started. At the same time, the state is simultaneously switched from the non-lighting state to the lighting state. When the medal insertion possible lamp is turned on, it becomes possible to insert a game medal. This is because, even during the replay game, if the number of stored game medals has not reached the upper limit, the game medals can be inserted. Is added to the stored number (returned after reaching the upper limit of the stored number) (the same applies to the following lighting timing patterns 3 to 10).

In the lighting timing pattern 3 shown in FIG. 57 (A), the replay lamp remains in a non-lighting state from before the display of the replay symbol, through the display of the replay symbol and the third stop switch-off, until the start lever operation can be started. It is maintained, and switches from the non-lighting state to the lighting state when the start lever operation can be started. The 1 BET lamp, the 2 BET lamp, and the 3 BET lamp are maintained in the lighting state during the replay game preparation period and before and after the period. The start lamp and the medal insertion possible lamp are maintained in a non-lighting state from before the replay symbol display until the start lever operation can be started after the replay symbol display and the third stop switch off, and the start lever operation can be started. At the same time (at the same time as the replay lamp), the state is switched from the non-lighting state to the lighting state.

  In the lighting timing pattern 4 shown in FIG. 57 (B), the replay lamp is maintained in the non-lighting state during the first half period of the replay game preparation from before the display of the replay symbol, and during the second half of the replay game preparation (period during the period). It does not include both end points, ie, when the third stop switch is turned off and when the start lever operation can be started, but may include both end points or may include either end point. Immediately after the stop switch is turned off), the state is switched from the non-lighting state to the lighting state. The 1BET lamp is maintained in the lighting state during the replay game preparation period and before and after the period. The 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp are simultaneously turned off (switched from the lighting state to the non-lighting state) during the second half of the replay game preparation (after the replay lamp is turned on), and then the 2BET lamp is turned on until the start lever operation can be started. The 3BET lamp is turned on first, and when the start lever operation can be started, the 3BET lamp is turned on. Note that the replay lamps are set before the 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp are turned off (switched from the lighting state to the non-lighting state), and the 2BET lamp, the 3BET lamp, the start lamp, and the medal insertion in the second half period of the replay game preparation. The lamp is turned on (switches from the non-lighting state to the lighting state) before the possible lamp is turned on. The start lamp and the medal insertion possible lamp are maintained in a non-lighting state from before the replay symbol display until the start lever operation can be started after the replay symbol display and the third stop switch off, and the start lever operation can be started. At the same time, at the same time (simultaneously with the 3BET lamp), the state is switched from the non-lighting state to the lighting state.

  In the lighting timing pattern 5 shown in FIG. 58 (A), the 1-BET lamp, the 2-BET lamp, and the 3-BET lamp continue to be lit from before the replay symbol is displayed until during the first half of the replay game preparation, and during the second half of the replay game preparation (for example, , Immediately after the third stop switch is turned off), the lights are simultaneously turned off (switched from the lighting state to the non-lighting state), and then the 1BET lamp and the 2BET lamp are simultaneously (or 1BET) until the start lever operation can be started. The lamp is turned on slightly earlier than the 2BET lamp), and the 3BET lamp is turned on when the start lever operation can be started. The replay lamp is maintained in a non-lighting state during the first half of the replay game preparation from before the display of the replay symbol, and during the second half of the replay game preparation, simultaneously with the lighting of the 1 BET lamp and the 2 BET lamp, and the 3 BET lamp. The lamp is turned on (switches from a non-lighting state to a lighting state) before the start lamp and the medal insertion possible lamp. The start lamp and the medal insertion possible lamp are maintained in a non-lighting state from before the replay symbol display until the start lever operation can be started after the replay symbol display and the third stop switch off, and the start lever operation can be started. At the same time, at the same time (simultaneously with the 3BET lamp), the state is switched from the non-lighting state to the lighting state.

In the lighting timing pattern 6 shown in FIG. 58 (B), the 1-BET lamp is maintained in the lighting state during the replay game preparation period and before and after the period. The 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp continue to light during the first half period of the replay game preparation from before the display of the replay symbol, and at a predetermined timing in the second half period of the replay game preparation (for example, immediately after the third stop switch-off), At the same time, the light is once turned off (switched from a lighting state to a non-lighting state), and thereafter, the 2 BET lamp and the 3 BET lamp are re-lit in order until the start lever operation can be started. The replay lamp is maintained in a non-lighting state during the first half period of the replay game preparation from before the display of the replay symbol, and during the second half of the replay game preparation, at the same time when the 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp are turned off, and at the same time as the 2BET lamp. The lamp is turned on (switches from a non-lighting state to a lighting state) before re-lighting of the 3BET lamp, the start lamp, and the medal insertion possible lamp.

  In the lighting timing pattern 7 shown in FIG. 59 (A), the replay lamp remains in a non-lighting state from before the display of the replay symbol, through the display of the replay symbol and the third stop switch-off, until the start lever operation can be started. It is maintained, and switches from the non-lighting state to the lighting state when the start lever operation can be started. The 1 BET lamp, the 2 BET lamp, and the 3 BET lamp are maintained in the lighting state during the replay game preparation period and before and after the period. The start lamp and the medal insertion possible lamp are maintained in a non-lighting state from before the replay symbol display until the start lever operation can be started after the replay symbol display and the third stop switch off, and the start lever operation can be started. At the same time (at the same time as the replay lamp), the state is switched from the non-lighting state to the lighting state.

  In the lighting timing pattern 8 shown in FIG. 59 (B), the 1 BET lamp, the 2 BET lamp, and the 3 BET lamp continue to be lit from before the replay symbol is displayed until during the first half of the replay game preparation, and are predetermined during the second half of the replay game preparation. (For example, immediately after the third stop switch is turned off), the light is turned off simultaneously (switched from the lighting state to the non-lighting state), and then turned on simultaneously when the start lever operation can be started. The replay lamp is kept in a non-lighting state during the first half period of the replay game preparation and during the second half period of the replay game preparation from before the display of the replay symbol, and when the start lever operation can be started, the 1 BET lamp, the 2 BET lamp, and the 3 BET The lamp is turned on at the same time as the lamp is turned on (switches from a non-lighting state to a lighting state). The start lamp and the medal insertion possible lamp are maintained in a non-lighting state from before the replay symbol display until the start lever operation can be started after the replay symbol display and the third stop switch off, and the start lever operation can be started. At the same time, at the same time (the replay lamp, the 1 BET lamp, the 2 BET lamp, and the 3 BET lamp simultaneously), the state is switched from the non-lighting state to the lighting state.

  In the lighting timing pattern 9 shown in FIG. 60 (A), the replay lamp is maintained in the non-lighting state during the first half period of the replay game preparation from before the display of the replay symbol, and the predetermined time during the second half period of the replay game preparation. At a timing (for example, immediately after the third stop switch is turned off), the state is switched from the non-lighting state to the lighting state. The 1BET lamp is maintained in the lighting state during the replay game preparation period and before and after the period. The 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp are turned off at the same time at a predetermined timing during the second half of the replay game preparation (for example, immediately after the replay lamp is turned on) (switching from the lighting state to the non-lighting state), and thereafter, when the start lever operation can be started. By the time, the 2 BET lamp and the 3 BET lamp are turned on in this order. Note that the replay lamps are set before the 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp are turned off (switched from the lighting state to the non-lighting state), and the 2BET lamp, the 3BET lamp, the start lamp, and the medal insertion in the second half period of the replay game preparation. The lamp is turned on (switches from the non-lighting state to the lighting state) before the possible lamp is turned on. The start lamp and the medal insertion possible lamp are maintained in a non-lighting state from before the replay symbol display until the start lever operation can be started after the replay symbol display and the third stop switch off, and the start lever operation can be started. At the same time, the state is simultaneously switched from the non-lighting state to the lighting state.

In the lighting timing pattern 10 shown in FIG. 60 (B), the replay lamp is maintained in the non-lighting state during the first half period of the replay game preparation from before the display of the replay symbol, and the predetermined time during the second half period of the replay game preparation. At a timing (for example, immediately after the third stop switch is turned off), the state is switched from the non-lighting state to the lighting state. 1 BET lamp, 2
The BET lamp and the 3BET lamp are maintained in the lighting state during the replay game preparation period and before and after the period. The start lamp and the medal insertion possible lamp are maintained in a non-lighting state from before the replay symbol display until the start lever operation can be started after the replay symbol display and the third stop switch off, and the start lever operation can be started. At the same time, the state is simultaneously switched from the non-lighting state to the lighting state. The replay lamp is turned on (switches from a non-lighting state to a lighting state) before the start lamp and the medal insertion possible lamp are turned on during the latter half of the replay game preparation.

  There is a difference in effect due to the difference in the lighting timing pattern. Hereinafter, this point will be described. In the case of a pattern in which the start lamp and the medal insertion possible lamp are simultaneously turned on (lighting timing patterns 2 to 10 apply), if the start lamp is turned on before the medal insertion possible lamp, the player wants to insert a game medal. Even if you think, there is a risk that you may mistakenly think that the start lamp can not be inserted by turning on the start lamp first. There is a risk of misidentification. Therefore, by simultaneously illuminating the start lamp and the medal insertion possible lamp, it is possible for the player to smoothly determine the insertion of the game medal and the operation of the start lever, and smoothly perform the insertion of the game medal and the operation of the start lever. Can be performed.

  A pattern (lighting timing patterns 1 to 4, 6, 7, and 9) in which the 1-BET lamp is maintained in the lighting state during the replay game preparation period (or during the replay game preparation period and before and after the period). , 10)), it becomes easy for the player to recognize that the re-playing hand has been established and the automatic bet has been made, and the player can be quickly notified that the re-playing hand has been established. This allows the game to proceed smoothly. A pattern in which the 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp are maintained in the lighting state during the replay game preparation period (or during the period before and after the replay game preparation period) (lighting timing patterns 2, 7, and 10). In the case of (relevant), it becomes easier for the player to understand that the re-playing hand has been established and the automatic bet has been made, and the player can be notified of the re-playing hand being established as soon as possible. It becomes possible to proceed smoothly.

  In the case where the replay lamp switches from the non-lighting state to the lighting state before the start lamp (lighting timing patterns 1, 2, 4 to 7, 9, and 10 are applicable), the replay lamp is turned on first. , By informing the player that the replaying role has been established and the replay game will be performed, and then turning on the start lamp, the progress of the game (start lever operation is possible) Since the player can be notified, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed. When the replay lamp is lit (switches from the non-lighting state to the lighting state) before the medal insertion possible lamp (lighting timing patterns 1, 2, 4 to 7, 9, and 10 correspond), the replay lamp is turned on. By turning on the light first, the player is notified that the replaying game has been established and the replay game is to be performed first, and then by turning on the medal insertion possible lamp, it is possible to insert a game medal. Since the player can be notified, it is possible for the player to smoothly grasp the game situation.

When the replay lamp is lit (switches from a non-lighting state to a lighting state) prior to the 3BET lamp (or 2BET lamp and 3BET lamp) (lighting timing patterns 1, 4, 6, 7, and 9 apply) By turning on the replay lamp first, the player is notified that the replaying game is established and the replay game is performed, and then the 3BET lamp (or the 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp) is turned on. Since it is possible to notify the player that the automatic bet has been made, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed. In the case where the 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp are sequentially switched from the non-lighting state to the lighting state (lighting timing patterns 1, 4, 5, 6, and 9 apply), the 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp are turned on stepwise. Thereby, it is possible to more clearly notify the player that the automatic bet has been made, so that the game can proceed smoothly.

  In the case of a pattern in which the 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp are turned off simultaneously (switching from the lighting state to the non-lighting state) (lighting timing patterns 1, 4, 5, 6, 8, and 9 correspond), many display lamps light up If the player keeps the state, it may be difficult for the player to grasp the playing state. In this case, by turning off the 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp once at the same time, the player is notified of the playing state (the replaying That is, the automatic bet is established and the automatic bet is made). In the case where the replay lamp is a pattern in which the 2BET lamp is turned on before turning off once (lighting timing patterns 4 and 9 are applicable), by turning on the replay lamp first, the replaying game is established and the replay is performed. By notifying the player that the game is to be performed first, and then turning off the 2BET lamp lamp, the player can be notified of the automatic betting of the game medal in an easy-to-understand manner. The situation can be grasped smoothly.

  In the case of a pattern in which the 2BET lamp (or the 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp) is turned off at the same time as the replay lamp is turned on (lighting timing patterns 1 and 6 apply), I want to notify the player that an automatic bet will be made. If the 2BET lamp (or the 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp) continues to be lit, it may be difficult for the player to grasp the playing state, so the 2BET lamp (or the 2BET lamp and the 3BET lamp) is turned on. By turning off the light once, it is possible for the player to quickly grasp the game state. Also, by turning on the replay lamp at the same time, it is possible to notify the player at an early stage that there is no need to insert a game medal. In the case of a pattern in which the 3BET lamp and the start lamp are turned on simultaneously (lighting timing patterns 4, 5, and 8 apply), it is possible to promptly notify the player that the start lever can be operated, so that the game proceeds smoothly. Becomes possible.

  If the previous game is a replay game and the current game is also a replay game, a pattern in which the replay lamp is continuously lit from the previous game to the current game may be adopted. . By continuously turning on the replay lamp, it is possible to promptly notify the player that the replaying role has been established, so that the game can proceed smoothly.

  Another lighting timing pattern can be configured by appropriately combining some of the lighting timing patterns 1 to 10 described above. Each display lamp (replay lamp, 1 BET lamp, 2 BET lamp, 3 BET lamp, start lamp, medal insertion possible lamp) is turned on and off by processing on the main side (main control means side) (for example, timer interrupt processing). Lighting is controlled (a part can be controlled by the sub side). “Simultaneous” when turning on or off a plurality of display lamps at the same time includes a case where there is a certain small time difference. For example, even if the timing of lighting or extinguishing is shifted by a few interruptions between a plurality of display lamps, the player cannot determine the difference in the timing, so that there is no problem in treating them at the same time.

<< 4th Embodiment >>
Next, regarding the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment (hereinafter, also referred to as “slot machine of the fourth embodiment”), specifically, regarding the layout of the electronic components on the control board, see FIGS. 61 and 62 additionally. I will explain while. The slot machine of the fourth embodiment includes a main control board 600 (corresponding to the above-described main control board 60) for mainly performing control processing relating to the progress of a game.

  Various electronic components are mounted on the main control board 600. FIG. 61 shows a planar arrangement relationship of main electronic components mounted on the main control board 600. Specifically, as shown in the figure, on the main control board 600, a microprocessor MP01 as an IC element having a CPU function, other IC elements IC01 to IC15 without a CPU function, and resistors R01 to R26, collective resistors R31 and R32, capacitors C01 to C05 and C11 to C14, and connectors CN01 to CN04 are mounted. Further, on the main control board 600, pad portions P01 and P02 for mounting (soldering) a test IC element (not shown) used in a type test are formed. It should be noted that other electronic components such as a diode and an LED may be mounted on the main control board 600, but these are not shown.

  The microprocessor MP01 is a one-chip microcomputer in which an IC chip on which a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, and the like are mounted is enclosed in a rectangular parallelepiped package body. Has been implemented. Each of the IC elements IC01 to IC15 is a general-purpose IC element in which an IC chip on which a plurality of predetermined logic circuits are mounted is sealed in a rectangular parallelepiped package body. The resistors R01 to R26 are horizontal (axial) resistors configured by enclosing an electric resistance element in a columnar package, and the collective resistors R31 and R32 each include a plurality of resistors. It is a vertical type (radial type) resistor housed in one package. The capacitors C01 to C05 are axial type capacitors, and the capacitors C11 to C14 are radial type capacitors larger than the capacitors C01 to C05. The connectors CN01 to CN04 are electrical components that are joined to a harness-side connector (not shown) for electrically connecting the main control board 600 to another control board or an electric device. And a box-shaped housing surrounding the terminal group.

  FIG. 62 shows a height relationship between electronic components mounted on main control board 600. As illustrated, the height of the microprocessor MP01 (the distance from the surface of the main control board 600 to the upper surface of the package body of the microprocessor MP01 installed on the board surface via the socket S01) is H1. When mounted on the main control board 600, the electronic component taller than the height H1 of the microprocessor MP01 is a collective resistor (in FIG. 62, the collective resistor R31 is illustrated, but other components are also the same). ) And a radial-type capacitor (in FIG. 62, the capacitor C12 is shown as an example, but the others are the same). All other electronic components are shorter than the height H1 of the microprocessor MP01 (FIG. 62 illustrates only the axial type resistor R12, the IC element IC12, and the connector CN03. The same applies to resistors, IC elements, connectors, axial type capacitors, etc.).

<Direction of microprocessor and other IC elements>
As shown in FIG. 61, on the main control board 600, many IC elements IC01 to IC15 are mounted. A circuit connected to each terminal of each IC element is formed on the main control board 600. If the mounting position (direction) of the IC element is incorrectly mounted, the circuit will not function normally. Therefore, when mounting the IC element, the mounting direction of the IC element is grasped based on the position of the first pin 1P of the IC element, and the position of the first pin 1P on the main control board 600 is determined. The mounting work may be performed while checking. On the other hand, if the mounting directions of a large number of IC elements (positions of the first pins 1P at the time of mounting) are different for each IC element, it takes time and effort to confirm the mounting direction of each IC element, and the work efficiency is reduced. Would.

Therefore, in the slot machine of the fourth embodiment, the mounting directions of the respective IC elements are aligned in accordance with the mounting direction of the microprocessor MP01 on the main control board 600. Specifically, the microprocessor MP01 has a direction in which the long side direction (the long side direction of the upper surface of the package body) coincides with the horizontal direction in the figure (the direction of one side of the main control board 600 (the long side in this example)). (Hereinafter referred to as “horizontal direction”), and the first pin 1P of the housing terminal is mounted at a lower left position in the drawing. The IC element is mounted with IC01 to IC13 mounted in such a direction that the long side direction (long side direction of the upper surface of the package body) coincides with the horizontal direction in the figure (horizontal direction), and the long side direction is the vertical direction in the figure (main control). There are IC14 and IC15 mounted in a direction (hereinafter, referred to as a "vertical direction") coinciding with the other side (the direction of the short side in this example) of the substrate 600. Of these, all of the IC01 to IC13 mounted in the horizontal direction are mounted with the first pin 1P located at the lower left in the drawing, similarly to the microprocessor MP01. On the other hand, both the ICs 14 and 15 mounted in the vertical direction are mounted with the first pin 1P positioned at the upper left in the drawing.

  As described above, in the slot machine of the fourth embodiment, the positions of the first pin 1P are aligned for the microprocessor MP01 and the IC elements IC01 to IC13 mounted in the same horizontal direction on the main control board 600 (all of them). (Located at the lower left position in the figure). Therefore, when mounting the IC elements IC01 to IC13, it is easy to check the mounting direction, so that mounting errors can be reduced and the working efficiency can be improved. Further, in this example, the first pin of the test IC element is also mounted in the horizontal position at the lower left position in the drawing (the first pin for each of the pad portions P01 and P02). The land portions L1 and L2 are formed at the lower left position in the figure), so that mounting errors are less likely to occur.

  In this example, the positions of the first pins 1P are aligned for all of the horizontal IC elements IC01 to IC13, but some of the horizontal IC elements are mounted in the opposite direction. (The position of the 1st pin 1P is at the upper right in the figure). In this case, it is preferable that the IC element mounted in the opposite direction has a shape and a size that are easily distinguishable from other IC elements from the viewpoint of reducing mounting errors. Further, the substrate surface may be divided into a plurality of regions, and the mounting direction of the IC element may be changed for each region. For example, the substrate surface is divided into a left area and a right area, and the horizontal IC elements mounted on the left area are arranged such that the positions of the first pins are aligned with the lower left, and the right area is arranged. May be arranged so that the position of the first pin is aligned with the upper right.

<Distance between microprocessor and other IC elements>
When current is supplied to the IC elements (IC01 to IC15) installed on the main control board 600, noise may be generated from the IC elements. If such an IC element is installed near the microprocessor MP01, noise generated from the IC element may adversely affect the operation of the microprocessor MP01.

  Therefore, in the slot machine of the fourth embodiment, no IC element is arranged near the microprocessor MP01 on the main control board 600. Specifically, an imaginary boundary formed in the vicinity of the microprocessor MP01 (here, a virtual boundary formed at a position separated from the outer periphery of the package main body of the microprocessor MP01 by the length W1 in the short side direction of the upper surface of the package main body). In the area surrounded by the line BL1, no IC element is arranged. Note that W1 is equal to or longer than the length of one axial resistor (R01 to R26) (the length at the time of mounting).

As described above, in the slot machine of the fourth embodiment, all of the IC elements IC01 to IC15 mounted on the main control board 600 extend from the microprocessor MP01 to at least the length in the short side direction of the upper surface of the package body of the microprocessor MP01. W1 minutes apart. Therefore, even if noise is generated from the IC element, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the noise adversely affects the operation of the microprocessor MP01. It is preferable that each IC element is arranged at least twice as long as the length W1 from the microprocessor MP01.

<Height of electronic components placed around the microprocessor>
The microprocessor MP01 is automatically mounted on the main control board 600 by a mounting device such as a chip mounter. The mounting device grips the microprocessor MP01 and moves it to above the position to be mounted, and then moves the microprocessor MP01 downward to a predetermined height to mount it on the socket S01. If a component that is taller than the height of the microprocessor MP01 (the height H1 at the time of mounting) is mounted near the microprocessor MP01, the component will be different from the planned mounting position due to a data input error at the planned mounting position. When the mounting device moves the microprocessor MP01 downward at the position, the microprocessor MP01 and the jig holding the microprocessor MP01 may come into contact with tall components.

  Therefore, in the slot machine of the fourth embodiment, components taller than the microprocessor MP01 are not arranged near the microprocessor MP01 on the main control board 600. Specifically, in the vicinity of the microprocessor MP01 (the boundary line BL1 formed at a position separated from the outer periphery of the package main body of the microprocessor MP01 by the length W1 in the short side direction of the upper surface of the package main body). In the enclosed area, components taller than the microprocessor MP01 (in this example, the collective resistors R31 and R32 and the radial capacitors C11 to C14) are not arranged. Note that, even in the vicinity area, any component (excluding the IC element) shorter than the microprocessor MP01 may be disposed, but these components may not be disposed.

  As described above, in the slot machine of the fourth embodiment, all of the components (collective resistors R31, R32 and the radial capacitors C11 to C14) that are taller than the microprocessor MP01 are provided at least by the microprocessor MP01 from the microprocessor MP01. Are spaced apart from each other by a length W1 in the short side direction of the upper surface of the package body. Therefore, when the mounting device moves the microprocessor MP01 downward at a position different from the mounting expected position, the microprocessor MP01 or a jig holding the microprocessor MP01 comes into contact with a tall component, and the microprocessor MP01 or the Tall parts can be prevented from being damaged.

<< 5th Embodiment >>
Next, with respect to the slot machine according to the fifth embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as “fifth mode slot machine”), specifically, a built-in RWM (hereinafter, referred to as the main control means 100) of the main control means (hereinafter, referred to as the main control means 100). The memory map of “RAM” will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64.
Such a memory map of the RAM includes a set value data area, an external signal data area, a RAM checksum data area, a control command buffer area, a stack pointer temporary storage buffer area at power failure occurrence, an unused area, and a save data storage area. And the like.
The unused area means an area which may be used as an area for obtaining or clearing a checksum value, but is not used in a game.

  In a gaming machine, setting data as data used for a lottery process and the like is important in advancing a game. Therefore, it is necessary to surely prevent a state in which the set value data is rewritten for some reason when stored in the RAM.

  For example, when it is necessary to save a running program based on the occurrence of an interrupt instruction (save instruction), for example, the stack address is updated (subtracted), and then the executed program is stored in the save data storage area secured as a stack. Stores the value of the program counter of the middle program (original program). When returning to the original state, data is taken out from the save data storage area indicated by the stack address, and then the stack address is updated (added). As a result, it is possible to store information (return destination address) when returning to the original program, to what extent the original program has been executed. In the case where consecutive interrupts occur in the program processing, in order to return from the deep subroutine hierarchy to the original program, return destination addresses are stored in the save data storage area by the number of consecutive interrupts in principle. Therefore, the capacity of the save data storage area must be at least as large as the number of consecutive interrupts. However, the capacity of the save data storage area in such a case is almost fixed at the time of designing a program (at the time of a compiler) (the save data storage area is, for example, several bytes in consideration of the usual number of interrupts). (In FIG. 64, it is general to secure 8 bytes of saved data 1 to saved data 8), so by setting the capacity of the saved data storage area appropriately when designing the program, It is usually possible to avoid a situation in which the set value data is rewritten by the return address described above.

  However, when the program runs away due to some trigger and it becomes impossible to perform a necessary processing procedure, a continuous interrupt instruction may be generated from a watchdog timer (WDT) or the like, thereby causing the above-described saving data storage. The number (capacity) of information corresponding to the number of interrupt instructions is loaded in the area. That is, the return address is sequentially stored in each save data storage area by indicating the stack address that is sequentially subtracted (decremented) by the stack pointer.

  In such a case, the return address may be instantaneously accumulated in the stack, and may exceed the evacuation data area secured at the time of design, and may be located above (the address of the RAM is 0 address side). The rewriting process of the return address of the original program is performed up to the storage area of the RAM (the area where other data is stored) in the RAM of the area (the area of (1)). That is, the data described in the area on the address 0 side adjacent to the secured save data area is eroded by the return address, and the data stored in the RAM is lost. The rewritten unnecessary address data causes various undesired problems in operating the gaming machine.

  In particular, when the above-mentioned set value data area is arranged in the address area of the RAM in the area of the evacuation data area adjacent to the address 0, the set value data makes no sense. It is important to reduce the risk of such a situation to a minimum, since there is a risk that the data may be rewritten to invalid data, and it may become impossible to continue the game itself in the gaming machine. Becomes

Therefore, the gaming machine (slot machine) according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention has a configuration having the following requirements so that the occurrence of the above-described situation can be reduced to a minimum.
Hereinafter, five representative patterns of the present embodiment will be described by listing requirements.

<Pattern 1 gaming machine (slot machine)>
(1) A storage means (RAM) capable of reading and writing data is provided.
(2) The storage means (RAM) stores at least a first storage area in which set value data is stored, a second storage area that is an unused area, and data necessary for progressing a game. And a third storage area to be stored.
(3) The second storage area is set at an address position between the first storage area and the third storage area.
(4) By setting as described in (3) above, even if the number of data saved in the third storage area exceeds an upper limit in design, the setting value data is hardly overwritten.

  According to the gaming machine (slot machine) of pattern 1 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 63A, the game proceeds with the first storage area in which the set value data is stored at the address position. By arranging the second storage area, which is an unused area, between the above-described third storage area where necessary data is saved, interrupt instructions are continuously generated due to runaway of a program or the like. However, even if the return address data exceeds the save data area secured at the time of design and erodes and overwrites the area with the smaller address, the description is first made in the unused area. Since the setting is performed in a certain second storage area, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the setting value data is rewritten to meaningless data. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of causing a serious difficulty in playing the game (or making the game impossible).

<Pattern 2 game machine (slot machine)>
(1) The game machine (slot machine) of pattern 1 has the same requirements as requirement (1).
(2A) The storage unit (RAM) has at least a first storage area in which set value data is stored, a second storage area that is an unused area, and data necessary for progressing the game. And a fourth storage area for storing predetermined data transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine.
(3A) The second storage area and the fourth storage area are set at address positions between the first storage area and the third storage area.
(4) The game machine (slot machine) of pattern 1 has the same requirements as requirement (4).

  According to the gaming machine (slot machine) of pattern 2 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), the game proceeds with the first storage area where the set value data is stored at the address position. A second storage area, which is an unused area, and a fourth storage area, which stores predetermined data to be transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine, are arranged between the above-described third storage area in which necessary data is saved. As a result, interrupt instructions are generated continuously due to program runaway, etc., and the return address data exceeds the saved data area secured at design time and erodes the area on the lower address side and overwrites Even if the game is started, the description first stores the second storage area, which is an unused area, and predetermined data transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine, which is not directly related to the game of the gaming machine. Fourth Will be made in 憶領 range, it is possible to greatly reduce the possibility that is rewritten to the data setting value data does not make sense at all. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of causing a serious difficulty in playing the game (or making the game impossible).

<Pattern 3 gaming machine (slot machine)>
(1) The game machine (slot machine) of pattern 1 has the same requirements as requirement (1).
(2B) The storage means (RAM) has at least a first storage area in which set value data is stored, a second storage area which is an unused area, and data necessary for progressing the game. A third storage area for storing the checksum data of the storage means (RAM).
(3B) The second storage area and the fifth storage area are combined with the first storage area and the third storage area.
Is set at an address position between the storage area.
(4) The game machine (slot machine) of pattern 1 has the same requirements as requirement (4).

  According to the gaming machine (slot machine) of pattern 3 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 63 (C), the game proceeds with the first storage area where the set value data is stored at the address position. A second storage area, which is an unused area, and a fifth storage area for storing checksum data of the storage means (RAM) are arranged between the third storage area in which necessary data is saved. As a result, interrupt instructions are continuously generated due to program runaway, etc., and the return address data is overwritten in the area of the smaller address beyond the save data area secured at the time of design. , The description is made in the second storage area, which is an unused area, and in the storage means (R) which is not substantially used after the first processing such as power-on in the game. Will be made in the fifth storage area for storing checksum data of M), it is possible to greatly reduce the possibility that is rewritten to the data setting value data does not make sense at all. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of causing a serious difficulty in playing the game (or making the game impossible).

<Pattern 4 gaming machine (slot machine)>
(1) The game machine (slot machine) of pattern 1 has the same requirements as requirement (1).
(2C) The storage means (RAM) stores at least a first storage area in which set value data is stored, a second storage area that is an unused area, and data necessary for progressing a game. And a sixth storage area for storing command information to be transmitted from the main control means to the sub-main control means.
(3C) The second storage area and the sixth storage area are set at an address position between the first storage area and the third storage area.
(4) The game machine (slot machine) of pattern 1 has the same requirements as requirement (4).

  According to the gaming machine (slot machine) of pattern 4 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 63 (D), the game proceeds with the first storage area where the set value data is stored at the address position. The second storage area, which is an unused area, and command information to be transmitted from the main control means to the sub main control means are stored between the third storage area in which the necessary data is saved. By arranging the sixth storage area, interrupt instructions are continuously generated due to a program runaway or the like, and the return address data exceeds the save data area secured at the time of design, and the Even if the area on the smaller side is eroded and overwritten, the description is made directly to the second storage area, which is an unused area, and the main control essential for playing the game. Irrelevant, the command information to be transmitted from the main control means to the sub main control means is stored in the sixth storage area, and the setting value data is rewritten to data having no meaning at all. It is possible to greatly reduce the possibility of being performed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of causing a serious difficulty in playing the game (or making the game impossible).

<Pattern 5 gaming machine (slot machine)>
(1) The game machine (slot machine) of pattern 1 has the same requirements as requirement (1).
(2D) The storage means (RAM) has at least a first storage area in which set value data is stored, a second storage area that is an unused area, and data necessary for progressing the game. A third storage area for storing a stack pointer address when a power failure occurs.
(3D) The second storage area and the seventh storage area are set at an address position between the first storage area and the third storage area.
(4) The game machine (slot machine) of pattern 1 has the same requirements as requirement (4).

According to the gaming machine (slot machine) of pattern 5 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 63 (E), the game proceeds with the first storage area where the set value data is stored at the address position. The second storage area, which is an unused area, and the seventh storage area, which stores a stack pointer address when a power failure occurs, is arranged between the third storage area in which necessary data is saved. As a result, interrupt instructions are continuously generated due to a program runaway, etc., and the return address data is overwritten by eroding a smaller address area beyond the save data area secured at the time of design. Even if such a situation occurs, the description is first made in the second storage area, which is an unused area, and is not substantially used except when a power failure occurs, and the power failure occurrence that does not greatly affect a normal game is performed. It will be made in the seventh storage area for storing a stack pointer address when it is possible to greatly reduce the possibility that is rewritten to the data setting value data does not make sense at all. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of causing a serious difficulty in playing the game (or making the game impossible).
In the above-described memory map, predetermined areas other than the above-described storage areas are areas for storing various important data.

<Preferred embodiments of gaming machine of each pattern described above>
In the gaming machines of patterns 1 to 5 described above, one storage area (fourth storage area) is provided between the first storage area and the third storage area in addition to the second storage area or the second storage area. , The fifth storage area, the sixth storage area, and the seventh storage area). All of the fourth to seventh storage areas are different from the case of the setting value data directly connected to the game of the gaming machine, and the data stored in the storage area is overwritten and the contents are changed. It is also possible to insert a game medal, and the game can be continued.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 63A to 63E, in addition to the second storage area, one provided storage area (a fourth storage area, a fifth storage area, a sixth storage area, In any of the seventh storage areas, it is preferable to arrange them at an address position closer to the third storage area than an intermediate address position between the first storage area and the third storage area. As a result, the fourth to seventh storage areas are arranged in an address area closer to the third storage area than the intermediate address position between the first storage area and the third storage area. Areas other than the fourth to seventh storage areas, including the intermediate address position, are located in an address area farther from the third storage area, so that interrupt instructions are continuously generated due to program runaway or the like. Even if it occurs and the return address data exceeds the save data area secured at the time of design and erodes the area on the lower address side and is overwritten, the return address data is stored in the fourth to seventh storage areas. It is possible to reduce the possibility that data is rewritten in an area other than the above-described fourth to seventh storage areas that store more important data than the stored data.

  Further, in the gaming machines of the above-described patterns 1 to 5, it is preferable that a second storage area composed of an unused area is arranged adjacent to the side of the third storage area where the address is smaller. In an unused area, usually, data that has already been written is not erased. Therefore, the arrangement has the least problem compared to the case where another storage area is adjacent to the third storage area. be able to.

Further, in the gaming machines of patterns 1 to 5 shown in FIGS. 63A to 63E, in the address arrangement of the RAM, the second storage area is provided between the first storage area and the third storage area. One storage area (one of a fourth storage area, a fifth storage area, a sixth storage area, and a seventh storage area) is provided in addition to the area or the second storage area. Among the fourth to seventh storage areas, any combination of storage areas can be arranged between the first storage area and the third storage area.

  That is, two storage areas may be added in addition to the second storage area. For example, fourth and fifth storage areas may be arranged, or fourth and sixth storage areas may be arranged. May be arranged, fourth and seventh storage areas may be arranged, fifth and sixth storage areas may be arranged, and fifth and seventh storage areas may be arranged. Then, the sixth and seventh storage areas may be arranged. Further, the second storage area and the added two storage areas may be arranged in any order between the first storage area and the third storage area.

  In addition, three storage areas may be added in addition to the second storage area. For example, fourth, fifth, and sixth storage areas may be arranged, and fourth, fifth, and seventh storage areas may be arranged. A storage area may be arranged, fourth, sixth, and seventh storage areas may be arranged, or fifth, sixth, and seventh storage areas may be arranged. In addition, the second storage area and the added three storage areas may be arranged in any order between the first storage area and the third storage area.

  Further, in addition to the second storage area, fourth, fifth, sixth, and seventh storage areas may be arranged. FIG. 64 shows an address map of a RAM in which the second, fourth, fifth, sixth, and seventh storage areas are arranged between the first storage area and the third storage area. .

  In the above description, the second storage area is arranged between the first storage area and the third storage area in any of the embodiments. It is also possible to adopt a configuration that does not.

Hereinafter, the mode shown in FIG. 64 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 64, this RAM is a storage area used as a work area (data area, stack area, etc.) by the user program. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 64, the set values are stored in the memory space of 7F00H to 7FFFH. A first storage area for storing setting value data, which is a number for managing the second storage area, a second storage area as an unused area that is not used for a game, and save data saved by a CALL instruction, a PUSH instruction, or the like. A third storage area that is a storage area that may be stored, a fourth storage area that stores data related to external signal output, and a third storage area that stores checksum data for setting an addition value of the RAM area to 0. 5 is a control command buffer for storing command data transmitted from the main control means to the sub main control means. Storage area of 6, and the storage area of the seventh is arranged a buffer for storing a stack pointer at the time of power failure occurs until the power returns.
Note that the address of 8000H is a start address of the stack pointer, and is a value which is one more than 7FFFH which is an address of the save data 1 area for saving data first. Actually, when it is necessary to first save the program being executed, the value of the program counter to be saved is stored in the area of the save data 1 located at the address of 7FFFFH by decrementing the stack pointer by one. Is stored.

  Specifically, a first storage area for storing the set value data is arranged in an address space of 7F02H, a fourth storage area for storing external signal output related data is arranged in an address space of 7FC0H, Is stored in an address space of 7FCEH, and a sixth storage area, which is a control command buffer, is allocated in an address space of 7FD0H to 7FD5H, and stores a stack pointer (address) when a power failure occurs. A seventh storage area, which is a buffer for saving, is arranged in an address space of 7FE0H, a second storage area as an unused area is arranged in an address space of 7FF7H, and a third storage area where saved data can be stored is provided. It is arranged in the address space of 7FF7H to 7FFFH.

  The sixth storage area, which is a control command buffer, is assigned a capacity of 6 bytes, and the third storage area in which save data can be saved is assigned a capacity of 8 bytes. The other storage area is assigned a capacity of 1 byte.

  According to the gaming machine (slot machine) in which the address space of the RAM is configured as shown in FIG. 64, the first storage area in which the set value data is stored and the data necessary for progressing the game are saved. A second storage area, which is an unused area, a fourth storage area for storing predetermined data transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine, and a storage means (RAM). A fifth storage area for storing checksum data, a sixth storage area for storing command information to be transmitted from the main control means to the sub main control means, and a seventh storage area for storing a stack pointer address when a power failure occurs. When the unexpected situation occurs, the setting value data stored in the first storage area is overwritten by data that has no meaning at all even if an unexpected situation occurs. It can be greatly reduced.

  In other words, interrupt instructions are continuously generated due to program runaway, etc., and the return address data exceeds the save data area secured at the time of design and erodes the area on the smaller address side and overwrites. Even if a power failure occurs, the description is made first in the second storage area, which is an unused area, and then, the power is not substantially used except when a power failure occurs, and the power failure does not greatly affect a normal game. A seventh storage area for storing the stack pointer address when the event occurs, and then for storing command information for transmission from the main control means to the sub-main control means, which is not directly related to the main control means essential for playing a game. A sixth storage area for storing checksum data of a storage means (RAM) which is not substantially used after the first processing such as power-on in a game. In the area, further, in a fourth storage area for storing predetermined data which is not directly related to the game and which is transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine, the setting data is rewritten to data having no meaning at all. It is possible to greatly reduce the possibility of being performed.

  Thereby, the possibility that it becomes impossible to play a game with the gaming machine can be greatly reduced. In particular, an unused area is arranged at a position closest to the third storage area, and even if unnecessary return address data is described in this unused area, there is no danger that the data will be overwritten. It is a highly secure arrangement.

  In the mode shown in FIG. 64, the first storage area between the first storage area where the set value data is stored and the third storage area where the data necessary for progressing the game is saved A fourth storage area for storing predetermined data transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine, a fifth storage area for storing checksum data in a storage means (RAM), and A sixth storage area for storing command information to be transmitted to the control means, a seventh storage area for storing a stack pointer address when a power failure occurs, and a second storage area that is an unused area are arranged. However, the arrangement of these storage areas is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. 64, and they can be arranged in any order.

For example, between the first storage area and the third storage area, a fourth storage area is arranged at a position closest to the first storage area among the five storage areas, and the other fifth storage area is arranged. , The sixth storage area, the seventh storage area, and the second storage area can be changed and arranged in any order. In these arrangements, since the fourth storage area is arranged closest to the first storage area, the fourth storage area is transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine together with the set value data stored in the first storage area. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the data stored in the fourth storage area for storing the predetermined data is rewritten to data having no meaning at all. Thereby, the predetermined data transmitted to the outside of the gaming machine can be made correct, and accurate information can be transmitted to a hall manager or the like.

  Further, for example, between the first storage area and the third storage area, a fifth storage area is arranged at a position closest to the first storage area among the five storage areas, and The fourth storage area, the sixth storage area, the seventh storage area, and the second storage area can be rearranged in any order. In these arrangements, since the fifth storage area for storing the checksum data of the storage means (RAM) is arranged closest to the first storage area, the setting stored in the first storage area is set. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the data stored in the fifth storage area for storing the checksum data of the storage means (RAM) together with the value data is rewritten to meaningless data. As a result, the checksum data in the storage means (RAM) can be made correct, and the data value in the storage means (RAM) can be confirmed well.

  Further, for example, between the first storage area and the third storage area, a sixth storage area is arranged at a position closest to the first storage area among the five storage areas, and The fourth storage area, the fifth storage area, the seventh storage area, and the second storage area can be rearranged in any order. In these arrangements, the sixth storage area for storing command information to be transmitted from the main control means to the sub-main control means is arranged closest to the first storage area. The data stored in the sixth storage area for storing the command information to be transmitted to the sub-main control means together with the set value data stored in the sub-main control means may be rewritten to meaningless data. Can be reduced. Thus, the command information to be transmitted to the sub-main control means can be correct, and the effect processing performed using the sub-main control means can be improved.

  Further, for example, between the first storage area and the third storage area, a seventh storage area is arranged at a position closest to the first storage area among the five storage areas, and The fourth storage area, the fifth storage area, the sixth storage area, and the second storage area can be changed and arranged in any order. In these arrangements, since the seventh storage area for storing the stack pointer address when a power failure occurs is arranged closest to the first storage area, the setting value data stored in the first storage area is stored. At the same time, the possibility that the stack pointer address stored in the seventh storage area is rewritten to meaningless data can be reduced. As a result, the stack pointer address can be held at a correct value until the power failure is restored, and the original program can be continuously processed without any trouble.

  Of course, between the first storage area and the third storage area, the second storage area (unused area) is arranged closest to the first storage area, and the other fourth storage area , The fifth storage area, the sixth storage area, and the seventh storage area can be rearranged in any order.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (F), the memory space allocated to the built-in RAM may be configured to be continuous with the memory space of the built-in ROM for storing user programs and data. That is, the main control unit of the gaming machine can be composed of the built-in ROM allocated to the memory space of the addresses 0000H to 7DFFH and the built-in RAM allocated to the memory space of the addresses 7F00H to 7FFFH.

<< Sixth Embodiment >>
Next, regarding the slot machine according to the sixth embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as a “slot machine of the sixth embodiment”), specifically, during rotation of a reel (also referred to as a “turning drum”), rotation failure or power interruption occurs. The control process when the error has occurred will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67 additionally. In the slot machine of the sixth embodiment, three reels (corresponding to the above-described reels 3a, 3b, and 3c) and three stepping motors (the above-described stepping motors 35a, 35b, and 35c) for rotating the respective reels are provided. ), And the rotation of the reel is controlled by switching the excitation phase of the stepping motor.

  First, an outline of the reel control will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the stepping motor has four phases (φ0, φ1, φ2, φ3), and at the time of acceleration and constant speed, the 1-2 excitation method (φ0, φ0, φ1, φ1, φ1, φ2, φ2, φ2). The system is controlled by a method of sequentially switching eight excitation phase steps of φ2, φ3, φ3, φ3, φ0), and at the time of deceleration, is controlled by a deceleration method of exciting all phases of φ0 to φ3. The configuration and control method can be changed as appropriate). The switching of the excitation phase is performed in an interrupt process (corresponding to the above-described timer interrupt process) executed every predetermined time (for example, 1.5 milliseconds).

  As shown in FIG. 65, when a rotating body start operation (operation of a start lever) is received, an acceleration state process (a process of rotating the rotating body while accelerating until it reaches a predetermined rotation speed) is triggered by the operation. Is executed. In the acceleration state process, as shown in the figure, the excitation phase switching of the first step is performed when the number of executions of the interrupt process (also referred to as the “number of interrupts”) becomes 100 from the start time. Thereafter, when the number of interrupts is 50, the excitation phase switching in the second step is performed, and when the number of interrupts is 10, 5, and 2, the excitation phase switching in the third, fourth, and fifth steps is performed. . Then, at the time of executing the next interrupt processing after the interrupt processing in which the excitation phase switching of the fifth step is performed (when the number of interrupts is 1), the excitation phase switching of the sixth step is performed, and the acceleration state processing ( The excitation switching from the first step to the sixth step) is completed (the value of the number of interrupts that determines the switching timing of the excitation phase can be appropriately changed).

  When the acceleration state process ends, a constant speed state process (a process of rotating the rotating drum at a constant speed) is executed. In the constant speed state process, the excitation phase is switched every time the interrupt process is executed (the number of interrupts is one). During the execution of the constant-speed state process, when a rotation stop operation (operation of a stop switch for stopping the rotation drum) is received, a scheduled stop position of the rotation drum (deceleration state described later) is performed according to the received timing. A process start position) is determined, and a deceleration start process of rotating (sliding) the rotating body at a constant speed until the rotating body moves to the expected stop position is executed. Then, when the rotating drum moves to the expected stop position, a deceleration state process (a process of stopping the rotating drum while decelerating) is executed. In the deceleration state process, all phases φ0 to φ3 are excited while the stop symbol interruption process is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, six times).

  Next, a control process performed when a reel rotation failure occurs during the rotating drum constant speed state or the rotating drum acceleration state will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. In each flowchart, not only the processing content but also the state of the slot machine is described. FIG. 66A shows a processing procedure when a rotation failure of the reel occurs during the rotating drum constant speed state. In this case, when the rotating body start operation is received (J11), the state shifts to the rotating body acceleration state (a state in which the acceleration state processing can be executed) (J12), and the acceleration state processing is executed (J13). . When the acceleration state processing is completed (J14), the state shifts to a rotating drum constant speed state (a state in which the constant speed state processing can be executed) (J15), and the constant speed state processing is executed (J16). During the execution of the constant-speed state processing, a rotational drum rotation failure occurs (J17), and when the rotational failure is detected (J18), re-acceleration for normally rotating the rotational drum at a constant speed is started (J17). J19).

FIG. 66 (B) shows a processing procedure when a reel rotation failure occurs during the spinning drum acceleration state. In this case, when the rotating body start operation is received (J11), the state shifts to the rotating body acceleration state (J12), and the acceleration state processing is executed (J13). Even if a rotational drum rotation failure occurs during the execution of the acceleration state processing (J133), the unprocessed acceleration state processing (processing of the unexecuted portion of the entire process of the acceleration state processing) is executed as scheduled (J134). Then, the acceleration state process is terminated (J14). Thereafter, the state is shifted to the rotating body constant speed state (J15), and the rotating body constant speed state is executed (J16). When the rotation failure of the rotating drum is detected during execution of the constant speed state processing (J18), re-acceleration is started (J19). In the re-acceleration, the same processing as the above-described acceleration state processing may be performed, or a re-acceleration state processing having a different content from the acceleration state processing is separately defined, and the re-acceleration state processing is performed. You may.

  When a rotation failure of the rotating drum occurs during the execution of the acceleration state processing, it is also possible to detect the rotation failure and perform acceleration again. However, by executing the unprocessed acceleration state processing as scheduled, the rotation failure may be eliminated. Therefore, in this example, even if a rotational drum rotation failure occurs during the execution of the acceleration state processing, re-acceleration is not performed (detection of rotation failure may or may not be performed), and during the execution of the constant speed state processing. When a rotation failure is detected, re-acceleration is performed. In this way, if the uncorrected acceleration state processing is executed as scheduled, and the rotation failure is eliminated, it is not necessary to execute the re-acceleration, so that the game can proceed smoothly. Becomes In addition, the control processing during the acceleration state processing can be simplified (for example, even if a rotational drum rotation failure occurs, re-acceleration is not performed and rotation failure detection is not performed). It is possible to reduce the data amount.

  FIG. 66 (C) shows a processing procedure in the case where a power failure occurs during the rotating drum acceleration state, thereby causing a reel rotation failure. In this case, when the rotating body start operation is received (J11), the state shifts to the rotating body acceleration state (J12), and the acceleration state processing is executed (J13). Even if a power failure occurs during the execution of the acceleration state processing (J131) and a rotation failure of the torso occurs after the power recovery (J132) (J133), the unprocessed acceleration state processing is executed as scheduled (J131). J134), the acceleration state process is terminated (J14). Thereafter, the state is shifted to the rotating body constant speed state (J15), and the rotating body constant speed state is executed (J16). When the rotation failure of the rotating drum is detected during execution of the constant speed state processing (J18), re-acceleration is started (J19).

  In the case of this example, even if the power is cut off during the execution of the acceleration state processing and the rotation failure occurs, the re-acceleration is not performed (the rotation failure may or may not be detected). ), Re-acceleration is performed when a rotation failure is detected during execution of the constant speed state processing. In this way, if the uncorrected acceleration state processing is executed as scheduled, and the rotation failure is eliminated, it is not necessary to execute the re-acceleration, so that the game can proceed smoothly. Becomes Further, the control processing during the acceleration state processing can be simplified (for example, even if a rotation failure occurs due to a power failure, re-acceleration is not performed and rotation failure detection is not performed). Thus, the data amount of the control program can be reduced.

The detection of the rotation failure of the torso is performed, for example, as follows. Here, when the rotating body is rotating normally, when the stepping motor switches the excitation phase by 336 steps, the rotating body makes one rotation. In this case, when the rotating body is in the constant speed state, the process proceeds by one step for each interruption, so that if the rotating body is rotating normally, the rotating body makes one rotation in 336 interruptions. Therefore, the number of interrupts is counted, and when the winding drum makes one rotation, the count value is cleared, and the counting of the number of interrupts is started again. Whether or not the winding drum has made one rotation is detected by an index sensor arranged near the winding drum (that is, the count value of the number of interrupts is cleared when detected by the index sensor). In this way, when the rotating body is in the constant speed state, the rotating body should rotate once (detected by the index sensor) when (the count value of) the number of interrupts reaches 336. Therefore, if there is no detection by the index sensor even if the number of interrupts exceeds 336, it may be determined that a rotation failure has occurred. However, if it is immediately determined that the rotation is defective when the number of interrupts exceeds 336, the number of cases where the rotation is determined to be defective may increase and the reel control may be delayed. When the number of interrupts reaches 400 (the number of times can be changed as appropriate), it is determined that rotation is defective.

  Next, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 67 (A) to 67 (C), a control process when a winning combination which is always established irrespective of the pressing order and the pressing position (hereinafter also referred to as “winning determination combination”) is won. explain. In each flowchart, not only the processing content but also the state of the slot machine is described. FIG. 67A shows a processing procedure in the case where all the torso are normally stopped after the winning prize winning combination is won.

  In this case, when the winning combination is won (J31), and when the rotating body starts rotating (J32), the state shifts to the rotating body constant speed state (J33), and the constant speed state processing is executed (J34). Thereafter, the state shifts to a stop operation receivable state (a state in which the entire body rotates at a constant speed and the stop switch can be received) (J35). When the first stop operation is received (J36), the first operation is performed. A winning combination symbol (a symbol corresponding to a winning combination) is stopped and displayed on the activated line of the torso (the torso stopped by the first stop operation) (J37). Thereafter, when the second stop operation is received (J38), the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the pay line in the second torso (the torso stopped by the second stop operation) (J39). Further, when the third stop operation is received (J40), the state shifts to the rotating drum decelerable state (a state in which deceleration start processing and subsequent deceleration state processing can be executed) (J41). Thereafter, the deceleration start process is executed to move the third torso (the torso stopped by the third stop operation) to the expected stop position (J42). The winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line (J43). Then, after confirming the stop of all the torso (J44), the payout of the game medals is started (J45).

  FIG. 67 (B) shows a processing procedure in the case where the power is cut off after receiving the third stop operation. In this case, when the winning combination is won (J31), and when the rotating body starts rotating (J32), the state shifts to the rotating body constant speed state (J33), and the constant speed state processing is executed (J34). Thereafter, the state shifts to a stop operation acceptable state (J35), and when the first stop operation is accepted (J36), the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line in the first body (J37). Thereafter, when the second stop operation is received (J38), the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the pay line in the second body (J39). Further, when the third stop operation is received (J40), the state shifts to the rotating body stop state (J41). Thereafter, even if the power is cut off (J411), the deceleration start process is executed, the third body is moved to the expected stop position (J42), and the deceleration state process is executed. Thereafter, a power-off process is executed (J421), and the power is restored (J422). Since the deceleration start process and the deceleration state process are performed before the power-off process, the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line in the third body (J43), and the entire body is stopped (J44). After the confirmation of ()), the payout of the game medals is started (J45).

  In the case of this example, even if the power is cut off after the third stop operation is received, the third body can be moved to the expected stop position, and the winning combination symbol can be stopped and displayed on the activated line. (Even if power failure occurs, power of a level capable of controlling the rotating drum (power of a level not detected as power failure) is supplied for a predetermined period, and deceleration start processing and deceleration state processing are normally executed within the predetermined period. Configuration). Therefore, even if the power is cut off after the third stop operation is received, the winning symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on the activated line, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. Further, the game medals can be paid out immediately after the power is restored, so that the game can be smoothly advanced.

FIG. 67 (C) shows a processing procedure in the case where a rotation drum rotation failure has occurred after receiving the third stop operation. In this case, when the winning combination is won (J31), and when the rotating body starts rotating (J32), the state shifts to the rotating body constant speed state (J33), and the constant speed state processing is executed (J34). Thereafter, the state shifts to a stop operation acceptable state (J35). When the first stop operation is accepted (J36), the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line in the first body (J37). Thereafter, when the second stop operation is received (J38), the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the pay line in the second body (J39). Further, when the third stop operation is received (J40), the state shifts to the rotating body stop state (J41). Thereafter, rotation failure occurs in the third cylinder (J415), so that the deceleration start processing and the deceleration state processing cannot be performed normally, and the third cylinder can be moved to the expected stop position. (J416), the winning combination symbol cannot be stopped and displayed on the activated line in the third torso (J417). However, after confirming the stop of all the torso (J44), the payout of the game medals is started (J45).

  In the case of the present example, even if it is not possible to stop and display the winning combination symbol on the activated line in the third torso due to the rotation failure of the trunk after the third stop operation is received, the payout of the game medal It is supposed to do. This is because, at the time when the third stop operation is accepted, the winning combination is not internally displayed on the activated line in the third torso, although it is internally determined that the winning combination is established. In other words, it is considered that if the payout of the game medals is not performed, the player will be unduly disadvantaged. For this reason, if there is no problem in the program control, even if the actual stop position is shifted due to an external factor, it is determined that the winning symbols are the same as the display determination, and the player is provided with a profit. As in this example, even if the winning combination symbols are not aligned, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by paying out the game medals when the establishment is internally determined, And the progress of the game can be performed smoothly. In this example, the case where the winning combination is won is described as an example. However, the same control can be performed when a combination other than the winning combination is won. For example, when a winning combination that is established depending on the pressing order and the pressing position is won, and when it is internally determined that the winning combination is established when the third stop operation is received, a rotation failure thereafter occurs. Even if it is not possible to stop and display the winning combination symbol on the activated line, the payout of the game medal may be performed. On the other hand, when it is internally determined that the winning combination is not established at the time of receiving the third stop operation, the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line due to a rotation failure thereafter. , The payout of the game medals may not be performed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from unreasonably obtaining profits that cannot be obtained otherwise.

  In the example shown in FIG. 67 (B), even if the power is cut off after the third stop operation is received, the third body is moved to the scheduled stop position, and the winning combination symbol is placed on the activated line. The display can be stopped. On the other hand, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the winning combination symbol cannot be stopped and displayed on the activated line in the third body depending on the timing at which the power supply is cut off. Even in such a configuration, if it is internally determined that the winning combination is established at the time of receiving the third stop operation, then the power is cut off and the winning combination symbol is valid. It is preferable that payout of game medals is performed even when the stop display cannot be performed on the line.

Further, if a power failure or rotation failure occurs after receiving the third stop operation, error notification may be performed. This error notification may be performed whenever a power failure or rotation failure occurs, or when an award of a game medal is paid out (when the establishment of a winning combination is internally determined). If the notification is not performed and the payout of the game medals is not performed (the non-establishment of the winning combination is internally determined), the error notification may be performed. If the configuration is such that error notification is always performed, the number of times of determining whether or not to perform error notification can be reduced, so that the control program can be simplified. If the configuration is such that error notification is not performed when paying out game medals, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to error notification, so that the game can proceed smoothly. If payout of game medals is not performed, if error notification is performed, even if a winning combination symbol that should not be stopped and displayed on the active line is stopped due to power failure or rotation failure, It is easy for the player to understand that this is due to an error, so that it is possible to prevent the player from having a distrust of not receiving a game medal even if the winning combination symbols are aligned. It becomes possible.

  Note that, in the above description, the case where the power shutoff or rotation failure occurs after receiving the third stop operation has been described. However, the case where power loss or rotation failure occurs after receiving the first stop operation or the second stop operation. Can have the same configuration. For example, even if a power failure or a rotation failure occurs after the second stop operation is received, and the winning combination symbol cannot be stopped and displayed on the activated line in the second body, the first stop before the power is turned off. The payout of the game medals may be performed when the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line in the first and third barrels by the third stop operation after the operation and the power return. Similarly, even if a power failure or rotation failure occurs after the first stop operation is received and the winning combination symbol cannot be stopped and displayed on the activated line in the first body, the second state after the power is restored is returned. The payout of the game medals may be performed when the winning combination symbol is stopped and displayed on the activated line in the second and third barrels by the stop operation and the third stop operation.

<< Seventh Embodiment >>
Next, with respect to the slot machine according to the seventh embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as “slot machine of the seventh embodiment”), specifically, setting of the number of winning re-playing combinations and payout rate, and setting of bonus games 68 to FIG. 71 will be described.

  The payout rate in the slot machine is calculated based on the total number of game media inserted (bet) into the slot machine in order to play those games when a predetermined number of games are played (also referred to as “total bet number”). Means the ratio of the total number of game media paid out from the slot machine as a result of the game (also referred to as “total payout number”). The higher the payout ratio, the more advantageous the player is and the higher the profit that can be obtained. On the other hand, the disadvantage is disadvantageous for the game arcade and the operating profit is reduced. Conversely, the lower the payout ratio, the more disadvantageous the player may be, and the more disadvantageous the situation may be. On the other hand, it is advantageous for the game arcade, and the operating profit is increased. Therefore, how to set the payout rate is important in designing a slot machine (determining specifications).

  In the slot machine of the seventh embodiment, when the game is played a predetermined number of times (400 times, 1600 times, 6000 times, and 17500 times), the number of wins of the re-game combination is displayed in the middle column of FIG. The numerical value is set so as to be within the numerical value range shown, and accordingly, the payout rate is set so as to be within the numerical value range shown in the right column of FIG. In FIG. 68, the number of elected re-game players in 400, 1600, 6000, and 17500 games is indicated by P1, P2, P3, and P4, respectively. Designed payout rates are indicated by Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4, respectively. Note that the payout rate (Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4) is calculated by dividing the total payout number when a predetermined number of games are played by the total bet number. The bet number of the next game when the re-game combination is established is calculated as 0.

Furthermore, the following two methods are known as simulation methods for verifying the payout rate in design. The first method is a method of calculating a payout rate based on a game result when the spinning drum is stopped in an arbitrary pressing order and an arbitrary pressing position in all of the predetermined number of games. The second method is a method of calculating the payout rate based on the game result when all the winning combinations are realized in the game in all of the predetermined number of games. In both methods, when a plurality of set values (for example, set value 1 to set value 6) are provided for the winning probability of a combination, all the set values are verified, and a bet is made in one game. If the number of game media that can be played can be changed (for example, 1 bet, 2 bets, 3 bets), verification is performed for all bet numbers. In the slot machine of the seventh embodiment, the payout rate is set so as to fall within the numerical range shown in FIG.

Hereinafter, the contents shown in FIG. 68 will be individually described. With respect to the lower limit value when 400 games are played, the re-gaming role is set so as to be won at least 54 times (54 ≦ P1) by design, whereby the payout rate is designed by design. , Is set to exceed 、 １ (１ <Q1). If the lower limit of the payout rate is set lower than this, the player may fall into a disadvantageous state as a result of performing 400 games, but according to the present example, such a situation occurs. This can be prevented. If the payout rate does not exceed 1/3 at the stage where less than 400 games have been played, as a player, play up to 400 games and recover even a little Will increase the chances of having the player play at least 400 games as a gaming arcade, increasing the operating rate of the slot machine and securing a certain profit. It will be easier.

  The upper limit value when 400 games are played is set so that the re-playing role is won within a range not exceeding 300 times (P1 ≦ 300) by design. The rate is set to be less than 2.2 (Q1 <2.2). If the upper limit value of the payout rate is set higher than this, there is a risk that the game hall will be significantly disadvantageous as a result of performing 400 games, but according to the present example, such a situation occurs. This can be prevented. Also, if the payout rate is significantly lower than 2.2 at the stage where the number of games less than 400 has been played, as a player, the player will play the game up to 400 times and recover even a little (profit Will increase the chances of having the player play at least 400 games as a game arcade, increasing the operating rate of the slot machine and securing a certain profit Easier to do.

Regarding the lower limit value when 1600 games have been played, the re-playing role is set by design so that at least 219 times will be won (219 ≦ P2), whereby the payout rate is designed by design. , Which is set to exceed 2/5 (2/5 <Q2). If the lower limit of the payout rate is set lower than this, the player may fall into a disadvantageous state as a result of playing 1600 times. According to the present example, such a situation occurs. This can be prevented. In addition, when the number of games played exceeds 400 but less than 1600, the payout ratio is 2 /
If it does not exceed 5, the player will have the consciousness of playing the game up to 1600 times and trying to recover even a little (increase the profit). This increases the chances of having the player play the game up to the number of times, and increases the operating rate of the slot machine, making it easier to secure a certain profit.

  The upper limit value when 1600 games are played is designed so that the re-playing role is won within a range not exceeding 1200 times (P2 ≦ 1200) by design. The rate is set to be less than 1.5 (Q2 <1.5). If the upper limit value of the payout rate is set higher than this, there is a risk that the game hall will be significantly disadvantageous as a result of performing 1600 games, but according to the present example, such a situation occurs. This can be prevented. In addition, when the payout rate is significantly less than 1.5 at the stage where the number of games has exceeded 400 times but less than 1600 times, as a player, the game is performed up to 1600 times. As a result, players will have the opportunity to play up to 1600 games, increasing the occupancy rate of slot machines. It is easy to secure a certain profit.

Regarding the lower limit value when 6,000 games are played, the re-playing role is set so as to be won at least 821 times (821 ≦ P3) by design, whereby the payout rate is designed by design. , Which is set to exceed 1/2 (1/2 <Q3). If the lower limit of the payout rate is set lower than this, the player may fall into an extremely disadvantageous state as a result of playing the game 6000 times. According to the present example, such a situation occurs. This can be prevented. Also, at the stage where the number of games has exceeded 1600 but less than 6000, if the payout rate does not exceed 1/2, as a player, up to 6000 games are played. This will increase the chance that players will be able to play up to 6000 games as a gaming arcade, as well as increase the occupancy rate of the slot machine. It is easy to secure profits.

  The upper limit value when 6,000 games have been played is designed so that the re-playing role is won within a range not exceeding 4500 times (P2 ≦ 4500) by design, and thereby, the payout in design The rate is set to be less than 1.26 (Q2 <1.26). If the upper limit of the payout rate is set to be higher than this, there is a possibility that the playing field may be significantly disadvantageous as a result of playing the game 6000 times, but according to the present example, such a situation occurs. This can be prevented. In addition, if the ball-out rate is significantly lower than 1.26 at the stage where the number of games has exceeded 1600 times but less than 6000 times, as a player, the game is performed up to 6000 times. As a result, the opportunity to have players play up to 6,000 games increases, increasing the operating rate of slot machines. It is easy to secure a certain profit.

With respect to the lower limit when 17500 games are played, the re-gaming combination is set so that at least 2397 times are won (2397 ≦ P4) by design. , And is set to exceed 3/5 (3/5 <Q4). If the lower limit of the payout rate is set lower than this, the player may fall into a disadvantageous state as a result of playing 17500 times, but according to the present example, such a situation occurs. This can be prevented. Also, at the stage where the number of games has exceeded 6000 but less than 17500, if the payout rate does not exceed 3/5, as a player, the game is performed up to 17500 times. Since the player will have the consciousness of trying to recover (increase profits) even a little, as a game arcade, the number of opportunities for players to play up to 17,500 times will increase, and the operating rate of slot machines will increase and maintain a certain level It is easy to secure profits.

  The upper limit value at the time of playing 17500 times is set so that the re-playing role is won within a range not exceeding 13125 times (P2 ≦ 13125) by design. The rate is set to be below 1.15 (Q2 <1.15). If the upper limit of the payout rate is set to be higher than this, there is a risk that the game arcade will be significantly disadvantageous as a result of playing 17500 times, but according to the present example, such a situation occurs. This can be prevented. Also, at the stage where the number of games has exceeded 6000 but less than 17500, if the payout rate is significantly lower than 1.15, the player plays the game up to 17500 times As a result, players will have the opportunity to play up to 17,500 games, increasing the operating rate of slot machines. It is easy to secure a certain profit.

  Here, a simulation result of the payout rate will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 (A) shows an example of a result obtained when the simulation according to the above-described second method (the winning combination is always established in the game) is performed over 10 games, and FIG. ) Shows the winning combination (here, the bell combination and the replaying combination), the winning probability of the loss, and the number of payouts (when the number of bets is 3) in the simulation.

In this simulation result, the winning combinations from the first game to the tenth game are loss, bell role, replay role, loss, loss, bell role, replay role, bell role, loss, and loss, respectively. I have. The bet number is “0” for the next game when the re-game combination is established, and “3” for other games. The payout number is “6” when the bell combination is established, and “0” when the replay combination is established and when the player loses the game. Therefore, the total bet number in 10 games is “24”, and the total payout number is “24”. Becomes “18”. When the payout rate is calculated based on the simulation result, the payout rate is 0.75 (= 18 ÷ 24). This results in satisfying the above-mentioned design setting of the payout rates Q1 to Q4. In this simulation result, the bonus combination has not been won, but when a bonus game to be performed when the bonus combination is won and established is provided, a net increase of 2 (for example, a bet of 3 or payout of 5) is provided. It is preferable to use the bonus game.

  In the above description, the upper limit value (300, 1200, 4500, 13125) of the number of wins of the re-gaming combination in the design in the case where a predetermined number of games (400, 1600, 6000, 17500 times) are played is described. By setting, the upper limit (2.2, 1.5, 1.26, 1.15) of the payout rate is not designed to be exceeded. On the other hand, by setting the number of game medals to be paid out when the small winning combination is established, even if the number of winning re-gaming exceeds the upper limit described above, the payout rate is not It is also possible to configure so as not to exceed the upper limit of.

<Bonus game settings>
When the bonus game is installed, the payout rate is set higher than usual during the bonus game, so how to set the upper limit of the game media paid out during the bonus game is large in the overall payout rate. Affect. In addition, when the ratio of the number of combinations of symbols (also referred to as “bonus symbols”) that trigger the execution of the bonus game to the number of combinations of all symbols in all the torso is increased, the bonus game is executed. Since the ratio also increases, how to set the maximum number of bonus symbol combinations (also referred to as “maximum symbol combination number”) will also affect the overall payout rate.

  In the slot machine of the seventh embodiment, a total of three bonus games of two BB (big bonus) games (BB1 and BB2) and one MB (middle bonus) game (MB1) are mounted. The BB game is a bonus game in which a maximum of eight prizes can be won and a maximum of 15 payouts can be paid out by one prize according to the standard when designing a slot machine ("RB (regular bonus) game"). ) Is a bonus game that can be continuously executed. In the MB game, a bonus game in which at least one reel stops within a shorter time than normal (for example, 75 milliseconds) after the stop operation is received (also referred to as a “CB (challenge bonus) game”) Is a bonus game that can be continuously executed.

  Hereinafter, the setting contents of each bonus game will be individually described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG. 70A shows the setting contents of BB1 when the number of symbols on each reel is 21 and FIG. 70B shows the setting contents of BB1 when the number of symbols on each reel is 20 Indicates the content. As shown in the drawing, the upper limit of the number of payouts in the BB1 is “maximum 225” (the maximum number of the game is 225 in the BB1 regardless of whether the number of symbols on each reel is 21 or 20). The payout of medals is possible, but the payout does not exceed 225.) BB1 is set to “12” when the maximum number of symbols on the BB symbol is 21 when the number of symbols on each reel is 21, and “10” when the number of symbols on each reel is 20. Is set to

The pattern of the combination of the number of symbols on each reel of BB1 when the actual number of symbol combinations of the BB symbol is set to the maximum number of symbol combinations is as illustrated. That is, when the number of symbol combinations of the BB symbol is “12”, there are 18 combinations of patterns from the symbol number combination A1 to the symbol number combination A18, and when the symbol combination number of the BB symbol is “10”, There are nine combination patterns from symbol number combination B1 to symbol number combination B9. Each symbol number combination indicates the number of symbols on the left reel, the center reel, and the right reel. For example, symbol number combination A
1 indicates a pattern in which 12 BB symbols are arranged on the left reel, one BB symbol is arranged on the middle reel, and one BB symbol is arranged on the right reel. One BB symbol is arranged on the reel, six BB symbols are arranged on the middle reel, and two BB symbols are arranged on the right reel. The symbol number combination A15 is arranged on the left reel. The number of BB symbols on each reel is three, the number of BB symbols on the reel is four, and the number of BB symbols on the right reel is four. Together, it becomes "12").

  Similarly, the symbol number combination B1 indicates a pattern in which ten BB symbols are arranged on the left reel, one BB symbol is arranged on the middle reel, and one BB symbol is arranged on the right reel. The number combination B5 indicates a pattern in which five BB symbols are arranged on the left reel, one BB symbol is arranged on the middle reel, and two BB symbols are arranged on the right reel. , One BB symbol arranged on the left reel, two BB symbols arranged on the middle reel, and five BB symbols arranged on the right reel. Multiplying by the number of BB symbols results in "10").

  FIG. 71 (A) shows the setting contents of BB2 when the number of symbols on each reel is 21 and FIG. 71 (B) shows the setting of BB1 when the number of symbols on each reel is 20 Indicates the content. As shown in the drawing, the upper limit of the number of payouts in BB2 is “more than 285” (the number of payouts of game medals in BB2 is 285, regardless of whether the number of symbols on each reel is 21 or 20). BB2 ends when the number of sheets exceeds the number of sheets). BB2 is set to “6” when the maximum number of symbols on the BB symbol is 21 when the number of symbols on each reel is 21, and “5” when the number of symbols on each reel is 20. Is set to

  When the actual number of symbol combinations of the BB symbol is set to the maximum number of symbol combinations, the combination pattern of the number of symbols on each reel of BB2 is as illustrated. That is, when the number of symbol combinations of the BB symbol is "6", there are nine combinations of patterns from the symbol number combination C1 to the symbol number combination C9, and when the symbol combination number of the BB symbol is "5", There are three types of combination patterns, symbol number combination D1 to symbol number combination D3. For example, the symbol number combination C1 indicates a pattern in which six BB symbols are arranged on the left reel, one BB symbol is arranged on the middle reel, and one BB symbol is arranged on the right reel. The combination C4 indicates a pattern in which three BB symbols are arranged on the left reel, two BB symbols are arranged on the middle reel, and one BB symbol is arranged on the right reel. Two BB symbols are arranged on the left reel, one BB symbol is arranged on the middle reel, and three BB symbols are arranged on the right reel. Multiplying by the number of symbols gives "6").

  Similarly, the symbol number combination D1 indicates a pattern in which five BB symbols are arranged on the left reel, one BB symbol is arranged on the middle reel, and one BB symbol is arranged on the right reel. The number combination D2 indicates a pattern in which one BB symbol is arranged on the left reel, five BB symbols are arranged on the middle reel, and one BB symbol is arranged on the right reel. , One BB symbol arranged on the left reel, one BB symbol arranged on the middle reel, and five BB symbols arranged on the right reel. Multiplying by the number of BB symbols results in "5").

  FIG. 71 (C) shows the setting contents of MB1 (the upper limit of the number of payouts). As shown in the drawing, the upper limit of the number of payouts in MB1 is set to “exceeding 153” (when the number of payouts of game medals in MB1 exceeds 153, MB1 ends). In MB1, the number of symbols on each reel and the maximum number of symbol combinations of bonus symbols are not particularly set.

  In the slot machine of the seventh embodiment, the bonus game has a higher advantage for the player in the order of BB2> BB1> MB1. That is, BB1 and MB1 are bonus games having a lower degree of advantage compared to BB2, but are positioned as bonus games more advantageous than one RB game. In one RB game, it is possible to pay out a maximum of 120 coins (a maximum of eight prizes, and a maximum of fifteen payouts with one prize) according to the standard when designing a slot machine. Become. Therefore, if the upper limit of the number of payouts of BB1 or MB1 is set to “120” or less, a player who can receive only the payout may have an impression of a bonus game equal to or less than the RB game. Therefore, BB1 and BB1 are used to ensure that the player can recognize that the bonus game is more advantageous than the RB game (the number of payouts is larger than the maximum payout number “120” allowed in the standard of one RB game). The upper limit of each payout number in MB1 is set to “maximum 225” in BB1, and “exceeding 153” in MB1.

  BB2 is a bonus game having a higher degree of advantage than BB1 or MB1. Therefore, the upper limit of the number of payouts in BB2 is set to exceed the upper limit of the number of payouts of BB1 and MB1. However, if the upper limit of the number of payouts in BB2 is set too high, there is a possibility that a player who has acquired many game medals by BB2 may be more likely to fall into the game in an attempt to win BB2 again. Therefore, the upper limit of the number of payouts in the BB2 is set to “more than 285” for the purpose of preventing such immersion in the game (suppression of gambling). The numerical value “285” is a value larger than twice and smaller than three times the maximum payout number “120” that is allowed in the standard of one RB game.

<Other embodiments>
Next, another embodiment different from the above-described embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 72 is an external view showing the external appearance of a slot machine according to another embodiment. In the following description, “image” includes a still image and a moving image unless otherwise specified.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine, as a countermeasure for immersion (measures to reduce the number of players who play games beyond their own ability), a warning is issued during a game standby. However, most of the players who are watching the demo screen are not the players who are actually immersed, but rather the players who are about to start playing, so they can achieve the effects expected as a countermeasure against immersion. The number of players who played games beyond their own ability did not decrease.

It is considered that the immersion occurs as a result of the player being unable to make a cool decision. The timings at which there is a high possibility that a calm judgment cannot be made include the following timings.
(1) Timing at which the AT game ends During the AT game, a lot of game medals are given, so that the player's spirit increases, and it can be said that there is a high possibility that a calm judgment cannot be made. In addition, it is easy to have an expectation that the AT game is hidden (whether the player has won the AT lottery), and it can be said that there is a high possibility that a calm judgment cannot be made. Further, at the end of the AT game, the total number of game medals awarded during the AT game and the like are displayed on the image display device. At that time, if the number of game medals awarded during the AT game is smaller than the number of game medals corresponding to the amount of money used so far, it is easy to fall into a feeling of trying to win back (to win the AT lottery) and calm down It can be said that there is a high possibility that judgment cannot be made.
(2) Timing at which the bonus game ends During the bonus game, many game medals are awarded, so that the player's spirit increases, and it can be said that there is a high possibility that a cool judgment cannot be made. Also, if the number of times of winning the bonus combination is large, it is easy to have an expectation of a high setting (for example, the setting value is 5 or more), and it can be said that there is a high possibility that a calm judgment cannot be made. Furthermore, at the end of the bonus game,
The total number of game medals awarded during the bonus game is displayed on the image display device. At that time, if the number of game medals awarded during the bonus game is smaller than the number of game medals corresponding to the amount of money used so far, it is easy to fall into a feeling of trying to win back (to win the bonus role), and calm down It can be said that there is a high possibility that judgment cannot be made.

  Therefore, in another embodiment, a warning is issued at a timing when a special game in which many game medals such as an AT game and a bonus game can be given ends.

  FIG. 73 is an example of an end screen displayed on the image display device and an image for alerting (hereinafter, referred to as “alert image”) at the end of the special game. The end screen is an image showing at least the total number (TOTAL XXX) of game medals awarded during the special game and the background. Note that an image indicating the total number of game medals (TOTAL XXX) awarded during the special game may be prepared as an image separate from an image indicating a background (hereinafter, referred to as a “background image”). In addition, the alerting image is an image clearly stating "Let's be immersed. Pachislot is a play to enjoy moderately."

  Next, with reference to FIG. 74, the size of the alert image displayed on the image display device at the end of the special game will be described. If the alerting image is too small, the player cannot recognize the alerting image, and cannot exhibit the effect expected as a countermeasure for immersion. On the other hand, if the size is too large, there is a possibility that obstruction in viewing another image may be hindered. In other words, the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, in another embodiment, if the image display device that displays the alert image is less than 7 inches (in other words, if it is a small image display device), the size of the alert image is 10.00 mm in height. And the width is 64.12 mm. If the image display device that displays the alert image is 7 inches or more (in other words, if it is a large image display device), the size of the alert image is 30.00 mm in height and 192.37 mm in width. And

  Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the timing of displaying the end screen and the alert image on the image display device will be described. FIG. 75 shows the final game of the special game, and when a game medal is awarded in the final game (when a small role wins), an end screen is displayed on the image display device after the credit is added or paid out and a warning is issued. The image is displayed (FIG. 75 (a)). When no game medal is given in the final game (for example, when a replay combination is won), an end screen and an alert image are displayed on the image display device after the rotation of all reels is stopped (FIG. 75 (b)). ).

  Next, the timing of hiding the end screen on the image display device will be described. One reason for displaying the end screen is to teach the player the total number of game medals awarded during the special game. That is, if it is considered that the player has recognized the total number of game medals awarded during the special game, there is no problem even if the end screen is not displayed. Therefore, in another embodiment, the end screen is not displayed when the start switch is operated.

  In another embodiment, when a start switch is operated, an effect screen corresponding to a game situation at that time is displayed on an image display device. For example, if the bonus game or the game after the end of the AT game is a normal game and has been elected to the cherry role, which is one of the small roles, the fact that the player has won the cherry role as shown in FIG. An effect screen that suggests can be displayed. Also, if the game after the end of the bonus game is an AT preparation game, and the player has won the pressing bell role, which is one of the small roles, the stop switches are operated in any order as shown in FIG. 76 (b). It is possible to display a pressing order image (hereinafter, also referred to as a “navigation image”) indicating whether to perform and an effect screen during the AT preparation game.

  Next, a description will be given of the time during which the alert image is kept displayed. If the time for displaying the alerting image is too short, the player cannot recognize it, and the effect expected as a countermeasure for immersion cannot be exhibited. In addition, even if they can be recognized, they do not care and cannot exhibit the expected effects as a countermeasure for immersion. On the other hand, if the length is too long, there is a possibility that another image may be obstructed. In other words, the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, in another embodiment, an effect expected as a countermeasure against immersion can be exerted, and the alerting image is kept displayed only for a time that does not cause discomfort to the player. The appropriate time for continuing to display the alert image will be described step by step.

  First, with reference to FIG. 77, a description will be given of the time spent when the player plays the game in the shortest time. After the start switch is operated, the time spent from the start of rotation of the reel to the constant rotation speed of the reel is about 180 ms. In addition, the maximum time spent from the operation of the stop switch to the stop of the reel rotation is 190 ms (Article 6 of the Regulations on Approval of Game Machines and Examination of Model Types, etc. (Technical Standards on Model of Game Machines) ) Is specified in Schedule 5 (1) a (g)). Further, the time spent for adding the given game medals as the number of credits and the time spent for actually paying out are about 40 ms per one piece. That is, although the time spent when the player plays the game in the shortest time varies depending on the number of game medals to be awarded, if the specification is such that a plurality of stop switches cannot be operated simultaneously (a plurality of reels cannot be simultaneously stopped and controlled). About 750 ms to about 1070 ms (when the number of game medals to be awarded is 0 to 8), and about 370 ms to about 690 ms if a plurality of stop switches can be operated simultaneously (a plurality of reels can be simultaneously stopped and controlled). (When the number of awarded game medals is 0 to 8).

  Incidentally, even if the player plays the game in the shortest time, one game cannot be completed in less than the minimum game time (the minimum time required for one game is 4100 ms or more). This is based on Appendix 5 (1) (a) shown in Article 6 of the Regulations (Technical Standards for Gaming Machine Types) on Interpretation of Gaming Machines and Examination of Model Types, and Interpretation of the Technical Standards It is defined in the standards. Therefore, in another embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78, even when the previous game is played in the shortest time and the start switch is operated, the rotation of the reel is started by the reel in the previous game. One game is not completed in less than the minimum game time by setting 4100 ms after the start of the rotation of.

  Generally, in the BB game, which is one of the bonus games, a small role that does not need to be pushed (a small role that does not need to operate the stop switch aiming at a specific symbol) is won with a high probability (it is always won). Specification). In the AT game, the push order bell role and the push order replay role that require the stop switch to be operated in a specific order are won, but the order in which the stop switch should be operated is taught. Further, during a bonus game or an AT game, the player is in an excited state. Therefore, at least during the special game, many players play in the shortest time.

As described above, even if the player plays in the shortest time, one game cannot be completed in less than the minimum playing time. That is, as shown in FIG. 79, when the final game of the special game is played in the shortest time, even if the start switch is operated immediately, there is a certain amount of time until the reels start rotating. Further, even if the rotation of the reel is started, there is a certain amount of time until the rotation speed of the reel becomes constant. During these times, any operation by the player is invalid, so even if the alerting image is continuously displayed, it does not cause discomfort to the player. If the display is continued, the player may be uncomfortable. The reason is that if the time is exceeded, at least the operation of the stop switch becomes effective, but the stop switch is activated because the suggestion that the player has won the role of cherry and the alert image overlap as shown in FIG. May not be able to operate (because it is not clear which role to aim for), or because the alert image is displayed, there is anxiety that the stop switch must not be operated. . Therefore, it can be said that the time during which the alert image is kept displayed preferably does not exceed these times.

  Therefore, in another embodiment, the appropriate time for continuously displaying the alert image is set to 3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less. The reason why the length is set to 3000 ms or longer is that it is considered that the longer the longer the longer, the more the effect expected as a countermeasure against digging in can be exhibited.

  As shown in FIG. 80, it is considered that there are a few players who take a long time during the special game. In this case, if the alerting image is continuously displayed for 3210 ms, at least the operation of the stop switch becomes effective halfway, so that the player may feel uncomfortable. However, since the player plays the game over time even during the special game, there is a high possibility that the player does not feel uncomfortable than the player playing the game in the shortest time. By the way, if the game is played in the shortest time after the alert image is not displayed, one game can be completed before the minimum game time elapses. Therefore, although one game can be normally ended before the minimum game time elapses, one alert is displayed before the minimum game time elapses because the alert image is continuously displayed. There is no complaint that the game could not be completed (lost).

  Next, the position at which the alert image is displayed will be described. Basically, it is preferably displayed at a position where the player can easily recognize it. One of the positions that the player can easily recognize is a position above the center of the housing. This is because the height of the player's eyes is above the center of the housing.

  In another embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72, the image display device is provided above the center of the housing, and as shown in FIG. 73, the alert image is displayed above the center of the image display device.

  Of course, if the image display device is provided above the center of the housing, it is above the center of the image display device, the upper right corner above the center, the upper left corner above the center, the lower side than the center, the lower right corner below the center. Alternatively, a warning image may be displayed in the lower left corner from the center.

  In addition, it is preferable that the position at which the alert image is displayed is determined in consideration of the position at which another image is displayed. For example, it is preferable to display the alert image at a position that does not overlap as much as possible with the total number of game medals awarded during the special game (TOTAL XXX) or the suggestion of winning the cherry. Further, it is preferable to display the alert image at a position that does not overlap with the pressing order image as much as possible.

  Further, in another embodiment, a warning is issued even during a game standby. FIG. 81 shows a demonstration screen displayed on the image display device during a game standby.

  When the game is on standby, an image indicating the manufacturer is displayed first (FIG. 81 (a)). Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time, a warning image is displayed (FIG. 81 (b)). Further, after a lapse of a predetermined time, an image introducing the subject of the slot machine is displayed (FIG. 81 (c)). As described above, while the game is on standby, FIG. 81 (a) to FIG. 81 (c) are repeatedly displayed on the image display device.

As described above, most of the players who are watching the demo screen are not the players who are currently immersed, but are the players who are about to start the game. As a countermeasure against immersion, a method of impressing a player who starts a game not to be immersed in advance can be considered. However, if an excessive alert is issued, there is a possibility that a desire to play the game may be reduced. Therefore, in another embodiment, the time during which the image for alerting is displayed while the game is waiting is kept shorter than the time when the image for alerting is displayed at the end of the special game. In other words, it is less than 3000 ms. Specifically, it is set to 2000 ms or less. However, it is not limited to this.

  Incidentally, the position and the size of the alerting image are set to be the same as the position and the size when displayed at the end of the special game. This is because if the display position is changed depending on the situation, the burden on the sub-control unit may increase. Further, when the size is changed, it is necessary to prepare a plurality of images.

  Next, a case where an error occurs in the last game of the special game will be described with reference to FIG. In another embodiment, even if an error occurs between the start switch is operated and the rotation of all reels is stopped, the progress of the game is not stopped until the rotation of all reels is stopped. It has become. This is because, if the progress of the game is stopped, the concentration of the player may be cut off, and a mistake may easily occur when operating the stop switch. Note that the minimum game time (4100 ms) is measured even while the progress of the game is stopped.

  Then, when the rotation of all the reels stops (the progress of the game stops), an error image is displayed on the image display device. This is because if an error image is displayed when an error occurs, there is a possibility that the player may make an erroneous beat. After that, when the error is released, the progress of the game is resumed (if a game medal is provided, the provided game medal is added or actually paid out as a credit number), and an end screen is displayed on the image display device. The alert image is displayed.

  Although a certain amount of time is required until the error is cleared, the warning image is kept displayed for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less). Of course, the operation of the stop switch will continue to display the alert image even after it is enabled, which may give the player discomfort, but if the time for which the alert image is kept displayed is shortened, This is because there is a small possibility that the effect expected as a countermeasure against immersion cannot be exhibited. In addition, since it will take some time until the error is cleared, it may not seem that there is discomfort if the alert image continues to be displayed even after the stop switch operation is enabled Is high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 86, a case where an error occurs in a situation where a warning image is displayed at the end of a special game will be described. In another embodiment, when an error occurs before the start switch is operated, the progress of the game is stopped when the error occurs. Note that the minimum game time (4100 ms) is measured even while the progress of the game is stopped.

  When the progress of the game is stopped, the image display device displays an error image on the alert image. Incidentally, since it is necessary to promptly notify a game clerk that an error has occurred, the error image has a higher priority than the alert image. Thereafter, when the error is released, the progress of the game is resumed (if a game medal is provided, the provided game medal is added or actually paid out as a credit number), and the image display device displays the error image in a non-display state. Display.

Although a certain amount of time is required until the error is cleared, a predetermined time (3000 ms or more) is not included in the time during which the error image is continuously displayed (the time spent until the error is cleared). , 3210 ms or less), the alert image is kept displayed. Note that the time during which the error image is continuously displayed before the error image is displayed (an error occurs) is included. Of course, the operation of the stop switch will continue to display the alert image even after it is enabled, which may give the player discomfort, but if the time for which the alert image is kept displayed is shortened, This is because there is a small possibility that the effect expected as a countermeasure against immersion cannot be exhibited. In addition, since it will take some time until the error is cleared, it may not seem that there is discomfort if the alert image continues to be displayed even after the stop switch operation is enabled Is high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 87, a case will be described in which the supply of power is stopped while the alert image is displayed at the end of the special game. In another embodiment, when the power supply is stopped, the measurement of the minimum game time (4100 ms) is also stopped, and when the power supply is restarted, the measurement of the minimum game time (4100 ms) is restarted.

  When the supply of power is stopped, the image display device also stops, and when the supply of power is restarted, the image display device also restarts display. Note that the alerting image is kept displayed for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less), including the time that has been displayed before the power supply is stopped. As a result, if the game is played in the shortest time, the alerting image will not be continuously displayed even after the operation of the stop switch becomes effective, and the player will not feel uncomfortable.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 88, a case where the effect switch is operated in a situation where the alert image is displayed at the end of the special game will be described. In another embodiment, when a game medal is awarded, the game medal to be awarded is added or actually paid out as the number of credits, and then the game medal is inserted (the bet switch is operated and inserted from the insertion slot). During this time, when the effect switch is operated, a menu screen is displayed on the image display device. When a menu screen is displayed on the image display device, items such as password input, two-dimensional code display, and payout table can be selected. Specifically, each item can be selected by operating the cross key switch and the effect switch.

  Even if the effect switch is operated, the alerting image is kept displayed for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less). This is because, if the alert image is not displayed when the menu screen is displayed, there is a possibility that the effect expected as a countermeasure against immersion may not be exhibited.

  However, the position where the alert image is displayed is a position where the selected item can be recognized. In other words, as long as the selected item can be understood, it may be displayed in an overlapping manner. The position at which the alert image is displayed is set to a position that does not overlap as much as possible with the two-dimensional code displayed when the two-dimensional code display is selected. This is to prevent a player trying to finish the game from being unable to finish the game immediately by continuing to display the alert image.

  In another embodiment, at the end of the special game, the alert image is displayed on the image display device together with the end screen. However, when the number of game medals given during the special game is extremely small, the special game is displayed. At the end, the alerting image may not be displayed on the image display device.

This is because if the number of game medals given during the special game is extremely small, the player's spirit will not increase, and the number of game medals given during the special game will be greater than the number of game medals corresponding to the amount used so far. This is because even if the number of game medals is small, it is difficult for the player to fall into the urge to recover (since it is almost impossible to recover).

  An example of a case where the number of game medals awarded during the special game is extremely small is a case where the number is less than 300 during the AT game, and a case where the number is 50 or less during the bonus game. At the end of the special game or at a part of the demonstration screen, the alert screen is displayed on the image display device. However, at a certain time (for example, every one hour) or every certain number of games (for example, every 600 games). A predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less) may be displayed, or a certain time (for example, one hour) and a certain number of games (600 games) have elapsed since the last alerting screen was displayed. It may be displayed. At that time, the alerting screen may be displayed smaller in the upper right corner than the center of the image display device, or may have the same position and size as displayed at the end of the special game. When displaying, it may be displayed at the same time as other effects (continuous effect, notice effect, effect indicating the degree of expectation, etc.), or may be set so that the period during which the display is performed becomes an inoperable period. Is also good. By displaying the information periodically, a player who is not executing the special game can be alerted.

  In another embodiment, at the end of the special game, the alert image is displayed on the image display device together with the end screen. However, when the end screen is not displayed, the alert image may not be displayed. . For example, when 20 consecutive AT games are played, a moving image is displayed on the image display device during the 20th AT game. Then, even if the bonus combination is won during the 20th AT game, the image display device wants to continue displaying the moving image even during the bonus game or at the end of the bonus game. The end screen is not displayed. In such a case, it may hinder the visual recognition of the displayed moving image. Therefore, the warning image may not be displayed. However, at the end of the twentieth AT game, it is preferable to display an end screen and an alert image on the image display device.

  In the other embodiments, the size of the alert image is set to the size shown in FIG. 74. However, the alert image may have any size as long as the effect expected as a countermeasure is exhibited, and is larger than the size shown in FIG. It may be an image.

  Further, the size of the alert image displayed at the end of the special game may be changed depending on the situation. For example, the size when displayed together with the end screen and the size when displayed together with the effect screen may be different sizes.

  In another embodiment, when a game medal is awarded, the end screen and the alert image are displayed on the image display device after adding or paying out the number of credits, but the image is displayed after all reels stop rotating. The information may be displayed on the display device, or may be displayed on the image display device when the last stop switch is released. In addition, when the game medal is not given, the end screen and the alert image are displayed on the image display device after the rotation of all the reels is stopped, but the image display device displays when the last stop switch is released. It may be displayed.

  In another embodiment, the end screen and the alert image are displayed on the image display device at the same timing. However, the alert image may be displayed after the end screen is displayed. Further, a warning image may be displayed after a lapse of a predetermined time from the display of the end screen.

In other embodiments, the end screen is hidden when the start switch is operated, regardless of whether or not a game medal is provided in the final game. However, a game medal is provided in the final game. In this case, the end screen may be hidden when a game medal is inserted (the bet switch is operated or inserted from the insertion slot).

  Alternatively, the display may be hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed since the end screen was displayed. This is because not only the end screen but also the alerting image is displayed on the image display device, and the player who feels uneasy may not operate the start switch.

  In another embodiment, the image display device is provided above the center of the housing, but the image display device may be provided at the center of the housing. In this case, if the alerting image is displayed above the center of the image display device, at the upper right corner above the center, at the upper left corner above the center, and at the center, the image is displayed at a position close to the eye level of the player. Note that if only one image display device is provided, the player's gaze gathers there, so a warning image is displayed at the lower side of the center, the lower right corner of the center, and the lower left corner of the center. Is also good.

  Further, the image display device may be provided below the center of the housing due to the influence of the design of the housing. If only one image display device is provided, the line of sight of the player is gathered there, so that it is above the center, right above the center, left above the center, center, below the center, below the center. The alert image may be displayed in the right corner on the side and the left corner below the center.

  Further, the position of the alert image displayed at the end of the special game may be changed according to the situation. For example, the position when displayed with the end screen and the position when displayed with the effect screen may be different positions.

  In other embodiments, FIG. 81 (a) to FIG. 81 (c) are repeatedly displayed during the game standby, but the display order may be changed. For example, FIG. 82 (a) to FIG. 82 (c) may be repeatedly displayed. The reason why the player looks at the demo screen before starting the game is to check what the subject of the slot machine that is going to start the game is. In the case where the image for alerting is displayed before the image introducing the subject matter of the slot machine is displayed as in the other embodiments, there is a possibility that the game willingness is significantly reduced. It is preferable to change the order of the operations. Note that the order of replacement is not limited to this.

  In another embodiment, the time during which the alerting image is kept displayed during the waiting for the game is set to less than 3000 ms. However, if it is necessary to impress the player who starts the game not to be immersed in advance, 3000 ms. The above display may be continued.

  In other embodiments, the position and size of the alert image displayed during the standby for the game are the same as the position and size displayed at the end of the special game. May be changed. For example, as shown in FIG. 83, when the alert image is always displayed during the game standby, the alert image may be displayed in the upper right corner smaller than the center of the image display device. This is a contrivance for preventing a little excessive attention because the time for which the attention image is continuously displayed is long. Note that the display position and size are not limited to this.

  In another embodiment, even if an error occurs between the start switch is operated and the rotation of all reels is stopped, the progress of the game is not stopped until the rotation of all reels is stopped. However, the progress of the game may not be stopped until the game medals to be given are added or actually paid out as the number of credits (except when no game medals are given).

  In another embodiment, when an error occurs between the start switch is operated and the rotation of all reels is stopped, when the progress of the game is stopped, an error image is displayed on the image display device. However, an error image may be displayed when an error occurs. As a result, the game clerk can rush, and the error can be released immediately after the progress of the game is stopped.

  In another embodiment, when an error occurs between the start switch is operated and the rotation of all reels is stopped, the minimum game time (4100 ms) is measured even while the progress of the game is stopped. Although the measurement is performed, the measurement of the minimum game time may be stopped. As a result, if the game is played in the shortest time, the alerting image will not be continuously displayed even after the operation of the stop switch becomes effective, and the player will not feel uncomfortable.

  In another embodiment, when an error occurs between the start switch being operated and the rotation of all the reels being stopped, a predetermined time (3000 ms) regardless of the time spent until the error is released. As described above, the alerting image is continuously displayed for 3210 ms or less. However, the time for displaying the alerting image may be shortened by the time spent until the error is cleared or the time corresponding to the time. For example, when 60,000 ms or more is spent before the error is canceled, the alert image may be continuously displayed for 1000 ms.

  In another embodiment, when an error occurs in a situation where the alert image is displayed at the end of the special game, the error image is displayed over the alert image, but the alert image is not displayed. And an error image may be displayed. Then, when the error is released, the error image may be hidden and the alert image may be displayed. This is suitable when it is desired to give the same priority to the error image and the alerting image.

  In another embodiment, if an error occurs in a situation where the alert image is displayed at the end of the special game, the time during which the error image is continuously displayed (the time spent until the error is released) is used. The alerting image is kept displayed for a predetermined time (not less than 3000 ms and not more than 3210 ms), but the time during which the error image is displayed (the time spent until the error is cleared) is not included. The alerting image may be continuously displayed for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less). Regardless of whether or not an error image is displayed (whether or not an error has occurred), the alerting image may be continuously displayed for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less). There is no need to increase the burden.

  In another embodiment, when an error occurs in a situation where the alert image is displayed at the end of the special game, the time that has been displayed before the error image is displayed (the error occurs) is included. However, the time that has been displayed before the error image is displayed (an error occurs) may not be included. This is suitable when the error image is displayed and the player's consciousness is likely to deviate from the alert image.

  In another embodiment, when an error occurs in the situation where the alert image is displayed at the end of the special game, the measurement of the minimum game time (4100 ms) is performed even while the progress of the game is stopped. However, the measurement of the minimum game time may be stopped. As a result, if the game is played in the shortest time, the alerting image will not be continuously displayed even after the operation of the stop switch becomes effective, and the player will not feel uncomfortable.

In another embodiment, when an error occurs in a situation where the alert image is displayed at the end of the special game, the priority of the error image is set higher than the alert image, but the priority of the alert image is May be set higher than the error image. However, since it is not preferable that the type of the error that has occurred cannot be specified by the alert image, it is preferable that the position where the alert image is displayed does not overlap with the position where the type of the occurred error is specified. . Note that as long as the type of error that has occurred can be specified, the errors may overlap.

  Further, in this case, the alerting image is continuously displayed for a predetermined time (3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less) including the time during which the error image is continuously displayed (the time spent until the error is cleared). You may do so.

  In another embodiment, when the power supply is stopped under the condition that the alert image is displayed at the end of the special game, the time that has been displayed before the power supply is stopped is included. However, the time that has been displayed before the power supply is stopped may not be included. This is suitable when the power supply is stopped and the player's consciousness is likely to deviate from the alert image.

  In the other embodiments, the image display device that starts immediately (resumes display) when the power supply is restarted is used. However, even when an image display device that takes a long time to start is used, the power supply is stopped. The alerting image may be continuously displayed for a predetermined time (not less than 3000 ms and not more than 3210 ms), including the time that has been displayed before the warning. Depending on the time until activation, the alert image will continue to be displayed even after the stop switch operation is enabled, which may give the player discomfort, but the alert image is displayed. This is because, if the continuation time is shortened, there is a slight possibility that the effect expected as a countermeasure for immersion cannot be exhibited. However, if there is a possibility that a great deal of discomfort is given to the player, the time during which the alerting image is continuously displayed may be shortened by the time until the activation or the time corresponding to the time. It should be noted that the time that is continuously displayed before the power supply is stopped may not be included.

  In another embodiment, when a game medal is awarded, the game medal to be awarded is added or actually paid out as the number of credits, and then the game medal is inserted (the bet switch is operated and inserted from the insertion slot). In the meantime, when the effect switch is operated, the menu screen is displayed on the image display device, regardless of whether the game medal is given or not, until the start switch is operated. When the effect switch is operated, a menu screen may be displayed on the image display device.

  In another embodiment, the position at which the alert image is displayed is such that the selected item can be recognized when the menu screen is displayed, but is set so that the selected item cannot be recognized. You may. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player's consciousness from deviating from the alert image.

  In other embodiments, as shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, the operation of the start switch and the like is effective (the game progresses) even if the alert image is continuously displayed, but the alert image is displayed. As long as it is displayed, it may be frozen. In other words, the operation of the start switch or the like may be invalidated (the progress of the game is stopped). This will give the player discomfort, but can maximize the effect expected as a countermeasure for immersion. Specifically, since the progress of the game is stopped for a long time, the desire to play the game can be reduced to some extent. In this case, it is appropriate that the time during which the alert image is continuously displayed is a time during which the willingness to play can be reduced to some extent. However, if the time is too long (for example, a time equal to or longer than the minimum game time), there is a possibility that the player will not play the game again. Therefore, it is preferable that the time is 3000 ms or more and less than 4100 ms.

  In the case of freeze, as shown in FIG. 84, after the end screen is displayed on the image display device, the end screen may be hidden and only the alert image may be displayed. By displaying only the reminder image, the player's consciousness can be surely directed to the reminder image, so that the effect expected as a countermeasure for immersion can be further exhibited. Note that after a predetermined time (a predetermined time of 3000 ms or more and less than 4100) has elapsed since the display of the alert image, the alert image may be hidden and the end screen may be displayed again. Alternatively, only the alert image may be continuously displayed.

  81 (b), 81 (a) and 81 (c) are displayed in the order of FIG. 81 (b) during the game standby, and at the time of displaying FIG. (B) may be continuously displayed. This eliminates the need to prepare an image for displaying FIG. 84 (b).

  In the other embodiments, the alert is performed by the image display device. However, the alert may be performed by a device other than the image display device. For example, a warning image may be displayed on a panel portion of the housing at a position that is easily recognized by the player.

  The alert image is not limited to the illustrated example. For example, the image may indicate "Pachinko / Pachislot is a moderately enjoyable play. Beware of immersion." Or "Be careful of immersion. Pachinko / Pachislot is a moderately enjoyable play."

  The colors and fonts of the characters are free as long as they are not difficult for the player to recognize. For example, if the color of the background image when displaying the alert image is similar to that of the background image, it may be difficult for the player to recognize the color. Therefore, it is preferable that the color is different from the color that occupies most of the background image. In particular, a color that is positioned exactly opposite to the hue circle (hereinafter, also referred to as “opposite color”) or a color that is close to the opposite color is preferable because the color is more prominent.

  In another embodiment, a time appropriate for continuing to display the alerting image is calculated, for example, when the number of game medals given during the special game is eight at the maximum, but is given during the special game. Even when the maximum number of game medals is 8 or more and 15 or less, it is preferable that the appropriate time for continuously displaying the alert image is 3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less. Indeed, when fifteen game medals are awarded, the time spent is about 280 ms longer than when eight game medals are awarded. If the time is shortened, the alert image can be hidden before the operation of the stop switch becomes effective. However, even if the alert image is not displayed approximately 280 ms after the operation of the stop switch becomes effective, it can be said that the possibility that the player notices the notice is extremely low. In that case, the longer the longer, the more the effect expected as a countermeasure against immersion can be exerted. Therefore, the appropriate time for continuously displaying the alert image is preferably 3000 ms or more and 3210 ms or less.

  When the clearing process is performed after the alert screen is displayed, the alert screen may be ended even if the time when the clearing process ends is less than 3 seconds from the start of the alert screen display. In this case, the display of the demonstration screen is started after the settlement process is completed. This is because the player finishes the game by the settlement process, and the warning screen is displayed on the demo screen, so that it is not necessary to display the prevention of immersion. In addition, by ending the alert screen, it becomes clearer that the previous player is not playing the game, and the next player can play the game immediately without being puzzled by whether the previous player is playing the game. Will be able to do it.

It is to be noted that the above-described embodiments, modifications, and other embodiments can be appropriately combined, and that the above-described modified examples can be appropriately combined with each embodiment or a combination thereof. The present invention is also applicable to gaming machines other than slot machines (for example, pachinko machines, casino machines, arrangement balls, enclosed medals that do not use gaming medals or gaming balls, etc.).

  As an example of the enclosed game machine, a game machine that can play a game using an electronic game medium instead of a physical game medium such as a game medal and a game ball is exemplified. In such a gaming machine, the number of electronic game media can be displayed on a 7-segment display having a plurality of digits (two or more digits). Note that the electronic game medium may be configured so that the player can directly insert it into the gaming machine, or may be indirectly inserted from a device provided outside the gaming machine at the instruction of the player. Is also good. In the enclosed game machine, when a small role is established, an electronic game medium is given to the player (the number of electronic game media displayed on the multi-digit seven-segment display increases).

  In addition, in the enclosed gaming machine, an AT lottery and a bonus lottery (a role lottery for determining any one or more roles from a plurality of roles including a bonus role) are performed. Then, when the player wins the AT lottery or the bonus lottery, an effect for raising the effect (also referred to as a fantastic effect) is performed. Incidentally, even when the player has not won the AT lottery or has not won the bonus lottery, a staging effect is performed. An example of a stir-up production is a series of productions performed over a plurality of games, and a production (continuous production) that notifies whether or not an AT lottery has been finally won or a bonus lottery has been won. (Sometimes referred to as an "attracting effect"), or displaying an easy-to-stay background image on the image display device when the player has won the AT lottery or the bonus lottery. No.

  As a countermeasure against immersion, a game prohibition unit may be provided to prevent a player from playing (inserting) using an amount exceeding a predetermined amount (for example, 50,000 yen) per day. Specifically, it is possible to insert money until a predetermined amount of money is reached, and to make it impossible to insert money exceeding a predetermined amount of money. In the case of, the enclosed gaming machine may be provided, or in the case of an enclosed gaming machine that can be indirectly inserted, a device provided outside the gaming machine corresponding to the enclosed gaming machine is provided. You may.

  The remaining number of electronic game media can be managed by a device provided outside the gaming machine (specifically, when the game is over, the electronic number displayed on the multi-segment 7-segment display device). The game media may be deposited (stored) in a device provided outside the gaming machine), and the remaining number of electronic game media that have been stored may be inserted. In this case, the game prohibition means is to prevent the player from playing (inserting) using an amount exceeding a predetermined amount (for example, 50,000 yen) a day, separately from the insertion from the coins. Also, the total number of electronic game media to be input using the number and amount of electronic game media to be input from storage exceeds the number obtained by converting a predetermined amount to electronic game media. May not be able to be inserted.

Even if either the enclosed gaming machine or the device provided outside the gaming machine has a game prohibition means, the enclosed gaming machine has won the AT lottery or has won the bonus lottery If the amount used by the player exceeds a predetermined amount after the announcement of the AT game or the bonus game related to the announcement, it is not necessary to disable the game. Good. This is because it is too severe for a player not to be able to play the game, despite being notified. Also, the amount of money to be newly used is known to be high (about 1,000 to 2,000 yen). By the way, when the AT game or the bonus game is completed, the game may not be allowed to play (originally, the game cannot be played), and is displayed on a multi-digit seven-segment display. While the electronic game medium remains, the game may be allowed to be played (the electronic game medium provided during the AT game or the bonus game, and the money is not newly used. Because of that).

  In addition, in the case where either the enclosed gaming machine or the device provided outside the gaming machine is provided with a game prohibition unit, one game is performed when an AT lottery or a bonus lottery is won. The number of electronic game media required (e.g., 3) and the remaining number of electronic game media (e.g., 12) displayed on a multi-digit seven-segment display, (For example, the situation is described using three pieces of information. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The determination may be made based on any two pieces of information, and three or more pieces of information may include one or more pieces of new information such as information on the remaining number of electronic game media managed by a device provided outside the gaming machine (so-called coin storage). AT lottery and bonus To determine the timing of until the announcement that they are winning the lottery (something announcement to after the game) is desirable. This is to prevent the player from being unable to play before notifying that the game has been won. If the enclosed gaming machine is provided with a game prohibition means, the necessary information (available remaining amount, such as the difference between the amount currently used by the player and the predetermined amount, etc.) can be obtained from a device provided outside the gaming machine. Information and remaining number information of available electronic game media managed by a device provided outside the gaming machine are received and determined.

  In addition, when either the enclosed gaming machine or the device provided outside the gaming machine is provided with a game prohibiting means, and the game cannot be played shortly (the electronic equipment necessary for performing one game). (The number of game media is 3, the remaining number of electronic game media displayed on the multi-digit 7-segment display is 3, and the amount currently used by the player has reached a predetermined amount) It is desirable not to perform a stir-up effect as an effect of the next game, regardless of whether or not an AT lottery or a bonus lottery has been won. This is because if the game cannot be played as soon as the fanning effect is performed, the interest of the game is reduced, and there is a possibility that the game is separated.

  Further, before the situation where the game cannot be played shortly, a display may be displayed to advise that if the game is continued as it is, the profit may not be obtained even if the profit can be obtained. The display timing may be a state in which an amount of game media that can be used up to a required number of games can be lent out until a notice based on an AT lottery or bonus lottery is obtained and a profit based on the lottery result is obtained. May be the timing at which the amount specified by the user reaches a specific amount (eg, 45,000 yen) lower than the predetermined amount. With this advice, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a predetermined amount of money is used and a profit (AT game, bonus game) can be obtained even though the profit can be obtained.

1 slot machine 3a, 3b, 3c reel 25 start lever 26a, 26b, 26c stop switch 60, 600 main control board 70 sub-control board 70A sub-main control board 70B sub-sub control board 100 main control means 200 sub-control means 200A sub-main control Means 200B Sub-sub control means

Claims (1)

Equipped with storage means that can read and write data,
The storage means includes at least a first storage area in which set value data is stored, a second storage area that is an unused area, and a third storage area in which data necessary for proceeding with the game is saved. And a storage area,
By setting the second storage area at an address position between the first storage area and the third storage area,
A gaming machine characterized in that even if the number of data saved in the third storage area exceeds an upper limit in design, data of a set value is hardly overwritten.